FUJIFILM Business Innovation H825CDW Color Multifunction Printer User Manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	2746304
Application ID	Jcl+rtv41U37ZFK12PgpZw==
Document Description	(Short-Term Confidential) User manual_1
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	327.25kB (4090681 bits)
Date Submitted	2015-09-14 00:00:00
Date Available	2015-10-20 00:00:00
Creation Date	2015-08-31 17:27:59
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 10.1.2 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2015-08-31 17:52:33
Document Title	untitled
Document Creator	FrameMaker 12.0.2
Document Author:	40701

Dell™ Color Cloud Multifunction Printer | H625cdw
Dell™ Color Cloud Multifunction Printer | H825cdw
Dell™ Color Smart Multifunction Printer | S2825cdn
User's Guide
Regulatory Model: H625cdw
H825cdw
S2825cdn
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE:
• A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of the printer.
CAUTION:
• A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not
followed.
WARNING:
• A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2015 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Bonjour, iPhone, Macintosh, Mac OS, and AirPrint are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Adobe, PostScript, and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
RSA and BSAFE are either registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities
claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in
trademarks and trade names other than its own.
About License
XML Paper Specification (XPS): This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by
Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such
intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369; DES: This
product includes software developed by Eric Young (eay@mincom.oz.au); AES: Copyright (c)
2003, Dr Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved. This product uses published AES
software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms; TIFF (libtiff): Copyright (c)
1988-1997 Sam Leffler and Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.; ICC Profile (Little
cms): Copyright (c) 1998-2004 Marti Maria.
As for RSA BSAFE
This printer includes RSA® BSAFE® Cryptographic software from EMC Corporation.
ICC Profile Header
Copyright (c) 1994-1996 SunSoft, Inc.
Rights Reserved
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SUNSOFT, INC.
OR ITS PARENT COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of SunSoft, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without written
authorization from SunSoft Inc.
JPEG Library
Independent JPEG Group's free JPEG software
____________________
This package contains C software to implement JPEG image encoding, decoding, and
transcoding. JPEG is a standardized compression method for full-color and gray-scale images.
The distributed programs provide conversion between JPEG "JFIF" format and image files in
PBMPLUS PPM/PGM, GIF, BMP, and Targa file formats. The core compression and
decompression library can easily be reused in other programs, such as image viewers. The
package is highly portable C code; we have tested it on many machines ranging from PCs to
Crays.
We are releasing this software for both noncommercial and commercial use. Companies are
welcome to use it as the basis for JPEG-related products. We do not ask a royalty, although we
do ask for an acknowledgement in product literature (see the README file in the distribution for
details). We hope to make this software industrial-quality --- although, as with anything that's
free, we offer no warranty and accept no liability.
For more information, contact jpeg-info@jpegclub.org.
Contents of this directory
____________________
jpegsrc.vN.tar.gz contains source code, documentation, and test files for release N in Unix
format.
jpegsrN.zip contains source code, documentation, and test files for release N in Windows
format.
jpegaltui.vN.tar.gz contains source code for an alternate user interface for cjpeg/djpeg in Unix
format.
jpegaltuiN.zip contains source code for an alternate user interface for cjpeg/djpeg in Windows
format.
wallace.ps.gz is a PostScript file of Greg Wallace's introductory article about JPEG. This is an
update of the article that appeared in the April 1991 Communications of the ACM.
jpeg.documents.gz tells where to obtain the JPEG standard and documents about JPEG-related
file formats.
jfif.ps.gz is a PostScript file of the JFIF (JPEG File Interchange Format) format specification.
jfif.txt.gz is a plain text transcription of the JFIF specification; it's missing a figure, so use the
PostScript version if you can.
TIFFTechNote2.txt.gz is a draft of the proposed revisions to TIFF 6.0's JPEG support.
pm.errata.gz is the errata list for the first printing of the textbook "JPEG Still Image Data
Compression Standard" by Pennebaker and Mitchell.
jdosaobj.zip contains pre-assembled object files for JMEMDOSA.ASM. If you want to compile the
IJG code for MS-DOS, but don't have an assembler, these files may be helpful.
Math Library
Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that this
notice is preserved.
====================================================
copysignf.c: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
math_private.h: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
powf.c: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
scalbnf.c: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
libtiff
Copyright (C) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler
Copyright (C) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any
purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this
permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the
names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating
to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Zlib
zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library version 1.2.8, April 28th, 2013
Copyright (C) 1995-2013 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the
original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as
being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly
Mark Adler
jloup@gzip.org
madler@alumni.caltech.edu
____________________
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS
This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or
disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the
Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and in
applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas, 78682, USA.
October 2015 Rev. A00
Contents
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
About License
1 Before Beginning
20
About This Guide
21
Conventions
21
Finding Information
22
Product Features
23
Printer Overview
26
Front and Rear View
26
Front View
26
Rear View
27
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
28
Operator Panel
28
Status of Wi-Fi Button LED
30
Optional Accessory
30
2 Setting Up the Printer
31
Overview of the Printer Setup
32
Preparing to Set Up the Printer
33
Space Requirements
33
Securing the Printer
33
Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line
34
Connecting the Printer to the Wall Jack
34
Connecting the Printer to a Modem
35
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
35
Turning On/Off the Printer
37
Turning On the Printer
37
Turning Off the Printer
38
Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel
38
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
44
Overview
44
Connecting to a Wireless Network
45
®
Contents
Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows Only)
45
Connecting With WPS
46
Manually Connecting to a Wireless Network
47
Changing the Wireless Settings
49
Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network
49
Connecting the Ethernet Cable
49
Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install
(Windows®
Only)
50
Configuring With Other Methods
50
Connecting to a Computer With USB
51
Connecting the USB Cable
51
Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install
(Windows®
Only)
51
Configuring With Other Methods
52
®
Installing the Software for Windows Computers
52
Installing the Software and Print Drivers with Dell Printer Easy Install
52
Installing the Software and Print Drivers When the Printer is Connected to the Network
or Computer
52
Setting Up for Web Services on Devices (WSD)
57
Installing the Software for Macintosh Computers
58
Installing the Software and Print Drivers
58
Adding a Printer Using USB Connection
58
Adding a Printer Using IP Printing
58
Adding a Printer Using Bonjour
59
Configuring With Optional Accessories
60
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
61
Overview
61
Wi-Fi Direct
61
Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct
61
Printing via Wi-Fi Direct
63
Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network
63
Resetting the Passphrase
64
Resetting the PIN
64
Dell Document Hub
64
Android
64
iOS
64
Tap To Print/Scan
65
Preparations
65
Adding the Printer to the Mobile Device
65
Printing or Scanning
66
AirPrint
66
Setting Up AirPrint on Your Printer
66
Printing via AirPrint
67
Google Cloud Print
67
Preparing to Use the Printer With Google Cloud Print
67
Selecting the Version of the Google Cloud Print Service
67
Registering the Printer to Your Google Account
68
Sharing the Printer With the Google Cloud Print Service
69
Contents
Canceling the Registration to Google Cloud Print
70
Printing via Google Cloud Print
70
Mopria Print Service
Setting Up Mopria Print Service on Your Printer
71
Printing via Mopria Print Service
71
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX
Printing System (CUPS)
Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop
72
72
Installing the Print Driver
72
Setting Up the Print Queue
72
Setting Up the Default Queue
73
Specifying the Printing Options
73
Uninstalling the Print Driver
74
74
Setup Overview
74
Installing the Print Driver
74
Setting Up the Print Queue
75
Setting Up the Default Queue
75
Specifying the Printing Options
76
Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator
76
Uninstalling the Print Driver
76
Operation on Ubuntu 12.04 LTS
77
Setup Overview
77
Installing the Print Driver
77
Setting the IP Address
Assigning an IP Address
80
80
When Using the Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows® Only)
80
When Using the Operator Panel
81
Verifying the IP Settings
81
Verifying the Settings Using Operator Panel
82
Verifying the Settings Using System Settings Report
82
3 Using Your Printer
Using the Operator Panel
83
84
About the Home Screen
84
Basic Operations on the Touch Panel
85
Selecting the Item on the Screen
85
Scrolling the Screen or the Listed Items
85
Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles
72
Setup Overview
Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11
71
Contents
86
To Move the Tiles
86
To Add the Tiles
86
To Delete the Tiles
87
Using the Keyboard Displayed on the Touch Panel
87
To Change the Keyboard Layout
87
Changing the Language
88
Panel Lock
88
Enabling the Panel Lock
88
Changing the Panel Lock Password
88
Disabling the Panel Lock
89
Setting the Power Saver Timer
89
About the Concurrent Jobs Feature
89
Understanding the System Menus
90
Report / List
90
System Settings
90
Panel Settings
90
PCL Fonts List
90
PCL Macros List
90
PS Fonts List
90
PDF Fonts List
90
Job History
90
Error History
91
Print Meter
91
Color Test Page
91
Protocol Monitor
91
Speed Dial
91
Address Book
91
Server Address
91
Fax Activity
91
Fax Pending
91
Stored Documents
91
Printing a Report / List
92
Wi-Fi | WPS
92
Wi-Fi
92
Wi-Fi Direct
92
WPS (Connect via PBC)
92
WPS (Connect via PIN)
92
Paired Device
92
Admin Settings
92
Phone Book
93
PCL
93
PS
95
PDF
96
Network
97
Ethernet
101
Fax Settings
104
System Settings
109
Contents
Maintenance
115
Secure Settings
117
USB Settings
120
Default Settings
121
Copy Defaults
121
Fax Defaults
121
Scan Defaults
121
Direct Print Defaults/USB Direct Print Defaults
122
Tray Management
Tray Settings
122
Tray Priority
123
Language Settings
123
Panel Language
123
Keyboard Layout
123
Resetting Defaults
Understanding the Job Menus
Print
125
125
125
Private Mailbox
125
Public Mailbox
125
Proof Print
126
Secure Fax Receive
126
Tile Settings
126
126
Quantity
126
Darken/Lighten
126
Output Color
127
Select Tray
127
2 Sided Copying
127
Sharpness
127
Reduce/Enlarge
127
Original Size
127
Original Type
128
Collation
128
2-Up
128
Color Saturation
128
Margin
128
Auto Exposure
128
Save Settings
128
ID Copy
Save Settings
123
Secure Print
Copy
10
122
128
129
Scan to Email
129
Scan to Network Folder
129
Scan to USB
129
Contents
Scan to Computer
130
Tile Settings
130
Scan Settings
130
Save Settings
132
Fax
132
Fax Settings
132
Save Settings
133
Print PDF/TIFF
133
Print JPEG
133
Print Settings
134
Dell Document Hub
135
Search for Files
135
Browse for Files
135
Scan
136
Smart OCR Scan
136
E-mail Me
137
Business Card Reader
138
Add App
138
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
139
Preparing to Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Setting Up Internet
139
Explorer®
139
Confirming the Menu on the Operator Panel
139
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
140
Page Display Format
140
Top Frame
140
Left Frame
141
Right Frame
142
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items
142
Details of the Menu Items
143
Printer Status
145
Printer Jobs
146
Printer Settings
146
Print Server Settings
159
Copy Printer Settings
179
Print Volume
179
Address Book
181
Tray Management
185
Print Media Guidelines
187
Supported Print Media
187
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
187
Tray1
188
Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
189
Supported Paper Weight
190
Contents
11
Unacceptable Print Media
190
Recommended Print Media
190
Recommended Pre-Printed Media and Letterheads
191
Recommended Pre-Punched Print Media
191
Recommended Envelopes
191
Recommended Labels
192
Print Media Storage Guidelines
192
Loading Print Media
193
Before Loading
193
Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
193
Loading Envelopes in the Tray1
Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
197
198
Loading Envelopes in the MPF
200
Loading Labels in the MPF
201
Loading Letterhead, Pre-Printed, and Pre-Punched Paper
202
Linking Trays
202
Loading Documents
204
Before Loading Documents in the DADF
204
Loading a Document in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
204
Loading a Document on the Document Glass
205
4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, Faxing, and Dell Document Hub
207
Printing
Sending a Job to Print
208
Canceling a Print Job
208
Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel
208
Canceling a Job From a Computer
209
Duplex Printing
209
Using Booklet Print
210
211
Overview
211
Procedures for Printing Stored Print
213
Printing From USB Flash Drive
214
Supported USB Flash Drive
214
Supported File Formats
215
Printing a PDF/TIFF or JPEG File in a USB Flash Drive
215
Printer Settings
Copying
Making Copies From the Document Glass
209
Using Duplex Print
Using Stored Print
12
208
Contents
216
217
217
Making Copies From the DADF
217
Using the ID Copy
218
Changing the Default Copy Settings
218
Scanning
220
Scanning Overview
220
Tips for Easy Network Scanning
221
Scanning to a Computer With a USB Connection
221
Scanning to a Computer With a Network Connection
221
Printer Setup for Scan to Web Services on Devices (WSD)
221
Scanning and Sending Images to the Computer
222
Scanning From a Computer Using Web Services on Devices (WSD)
223
Preparations for Scanning From the Computer
224
Scanning From the Computer
224
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver
224
®
Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver
225
Scanning an Image From the Drawing Software
226
Scanning Using Wi-Fi Direct
226
Scanning via Wi-Fi Direct
227
Scanning to a Computer or Server With SMB/FTP
227
Overview
227
Overview for Scanning to an FTP Server
228
Overview for Scanning to a Shared Folder Using SMB
228
Setting a User Account (SMB Only)
228
Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)
229
Setting SMB/FTP Destination Into the Address Book
231
Sending the Scanned Data on the Network
236
Scanning to a USB Flash Drive
237
Procedures
237
Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Data
237
Sending a Scanned Data via E-Mail
238
Gathering the Necessary Information About Your E-mail Account
238
Setting the DNS Server Address
238
Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server
239
Registering a Destination E-Mail Address to Address Book
240
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned Data
241
Managing the Scanner
242
Port Settings
242
Password Settings
243
Changing the Default Scan Setting
244
Faxing
245
Initial Settings
245
Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Dell Printer Easy Install
245
Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Operator Panel
246
Contents
13
Changing the Fax Settings
246
Sending a Fax
246
Sending a Fax From Memory
246
Sending a Fax Manually
248
Confirming Transmissions
248
Automatic Redialing
248
Sending a Delayed Fax
249
Sending a Fax Directly From a Computer
249
Overview
250
Procedure
250
Automatic Dialing
254
Speed Dialing
254
Group Dialing
255
Printing a Speed Dial List
256
Phone Book
257
Receiving a Fax
257
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes
257
Receiving a Fax Automatically
258
Receiving a Fax Manually
258
Receiving Faxes Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)
258
Receiving Faxes in the Secure Receiving Mode
259
Receiving Faxes in the Memory
260
Polling Receive
260
Reports Related to Fax
260
Changing the Default Fax Setting
261
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows® Only)
Registering the User and Signing In to the Dell Document Hub
262
262
Registering a New User to the Dell Document Hub
262
Signing In to the Dell Document Hub
263
Icons for the Dell Document Hub Screens
263
When the Favorite List Screen Is Displayed When You Tap the Tile on the Dell Document
Hub Screen
264
Returning to the Home Screen
264
Logging Out From the Printer
264
Searching for and Printing Files
264
Browsing and Printing Files
265
Scanning
267
Scanning the Document Using Optical Character Recognition (OCR)
268
Sending the Scanned Data to Yourself via E-Mail
269
Sending a Scanned Data of a Business Card to Yourself via E-Mail
270
5 Know Your Printer
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
14
Contents
271
272
Overview
272
Dell Printer Hub/Dell Print Management Tool
272
Printer Status Window
273
Status Monitor Console/Status Monitor Widget
273
Tool Box
273
Address Book Editor
273
Dell™ Supplies Management System
273
User Setup Disk Creating Tool
273
App Manager
274
Using the Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh
275
Status Monitor Widget
275
Before Installing the Status Monitor Widget
275
Installing the Status Monitor Widget
276
Opening and Closing the Status Monitor Widget
276
Printer Status Window
276
Order Window
278
Preferences
279
Using the Status Monitor Console for Linux
279
Status Monitor Console
279
Before Installing the Status Monitor Console
280
Installing the Status Monitor Console
280
Starting the Status Monitor Console
280
Printer Selection Window
280
Printer Status Window
281
Dell Supplies Management System Window
282
Service Tag Window
284
Settings Window
284
Software Update
285
User Authentication
286
Creating and Editing the User Accounts
286
Creating a New User Account
286
Editing the User Account
287
Deleting the User Account
287
Logging In to the User Account
287
Logging In Using the Touch Panel
288
Logging In Using the NFC Authentication Card
288
Logging In Using the Local Authentication or Remote Authentication
288
Logging Out
289
Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization
290
Adding a New Tile
290
Selecting From the Pre-defined Tiles
290
Creating a New Tile Including the Job Settings
290
Contents
15
Using the Address Book and Phone Book
292
Types of Address Books
292
Adding and Editing Entries to the Address Books
292
Using Operator Panel of the Printer
293
Using Address Book Editor
293
Address Book Panel
293
Editing an Entry
293
Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
294
Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book
294
Preparing the Printer to Access the External LDAP Server
294
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
294
Setting Authentication Type
294
Setting LDAP Server
295
Setting LDAP User Mapping
296
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned Data Using the E-mail Server Address Book
297
Sending a Fax Using the Fax Server Phone Book
297
Using Digital Certificates
298
Managing Certificates
298
Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication
298
Creating and Downloading a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
299
Importing a Digital Certificate
299
Setting a Digital Certificate
300
Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate
300
Deleting a Digital Certificate
301
Exporting a Digital Certificate
301
Setting the Features
302
Setting the Certificate in the IPsec Digital Signature Mode
302
Setting the SSL-Use Server Certificate (HTTP/IPP)
303
Setting SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication
303
Setting LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication
303
Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (EAP-TLS)
304
Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2, EAP-TTLS PAP, EAPTTLS CHAP)
305
Setting Client Certificate for IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS)
306
Understanding Printer Messages
Status Codes
307
Error Messages
314
Specifications
16
307
317
Operating System Compatibility
317
Power Supply
317
Dimensions
317
Weight
318
Contents
Memory
318
Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and Interface 318
Management Information Base (MIB) Compatibility
319
Environment
319
Operation
319
Print Quality Guarantee
319
Storage
319
Altitude
319
Cables
319
Print Specifications
319
Copy Specifications
320
Scanner Specifications
322
Fax Specifications
322
Wireless Connection Specifications
323
6 Maintaining Your Printer
324
Maintaining Your Printer
325
Checking the Status of Supplies
325
E-mail Alert Setting
325
Conserving Supplies
325
Ordering Supplies
325
Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
325
Using the Dell Supplies Management System
326
Storing Print Media
326
Storing Consumables
326
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
327
Removing the Toner Cartridge
327
Installing a Toner Cartridge
328
Replacing the Drum Cartridges
329
Removing the Drum Cartridge
329
Installing a Drum Cartridge
332
Replacing the Waste Toner Box
334
Removing the Waste Toner Box
334
Installing a Waste Toner Box
336
Cleaning Inside the Printer
337
Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor
337
Cleaning the LED Print Head
338
Cleaning the Scanner
341
Cleaning the DADF Feed Rollers
343
Moving the Printer
343
Removing Options
345
Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
345
Contents
17
7 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Clearing Jams
348
348
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams
348
Clearing Paper Jams From the DADF
348
Clearing Paper Jams From the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) and Tray1
351
Clearing Paper Jams From Inside the Rear Cover
353
Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
357
Basic Printer Problems
358
Display Problems
359
Printing Problems
359
Print Quality Problems
360
Light Printout
361
Smearing Toner/Loose Toner
362
Random Spots/Blurred Images
363
Blank Printout
363
Streaks
364
Black Printout (Partial or Entire Page)
365
Equally Spaced Colored Dots
365
Vertical Blanks
366
Mottle
367
Ghosting
367
Light-Induced Fatigue
368
Fog
369
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)
369
Jagged Characters
370
Horizontal Bands
370
Diagonal Lines
371
Wrinkled/Stained Printout
371
Damage on the Leading Edge of Printout
372
Jam/Alignment Problems
18
347
372
Incorrect Margins on the Top and Side
373
Disorganized Color Registration
373
Skewed Images
373
Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam
374
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) Misfeed Jam
374
Regi Jam (Exit Sensor On JAM)
375
Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Multi-feed Jam
375
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) Multi-feed Jam
376
Noise
376
Copy Problems
376
Fax Problems
377
Scanning Problems
378
Contents
Digital Certificate Problems
380
Wireless Problems
381
Problems With Installed Optional 550-sheet feeder
382
Wi-Fi Direct Problems
382
Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems
383
Other Problems
383
Contacting Service
383
Appendix
384
Appendix
385
Dell™ Technical Support Policy
385
Online Services
385
Warranty and Return Policy
385
Recycling Information
385
Contacting Dell
385
Contents
19
1
Before Beginning
20
About This Guide
21
Finding Information
22
Product Features
23
Printer Overview
26
About This Guide
Click the bookmarks to the left for information on the features, optional accessory, and
operation of your Dell H625cdw, Dell H825cdw, or Dell S2825cdn. For details about
other documentation included with your printer, see "Finding Information."
NOTE:
• In this manual, Dell H625cdw, Dell H825cdw, or Dell S2825cdn is referred to as the "printer."
• In this manual, the procedures for the computer are explained using Microsoft® Windows® 7 unless
stated otherwise.
• The images and screenshots used in this manual are those of the Dell H825cdw unless otherwise
mentioned.
Conventions
The following describe the meaning of the symbols and fonts used in this manual:
Item
Description
Bold texts
• Names of hardware button on the operator panel.
• Menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the
computer screen.
Texts in Courier New font
•
•
•
•
• Key on the keyboard of the computer.
Menus and messages displayed on the touch panel.
Screen name on the touch panel.
Characters entered from the computer.
Directory paths.
• Indicates a process flow.
• Cross references in this manual.
• Characters entered from the operator panel.
• Messages displayed on the computer screen.
About This Guide
21
Finding Information
What are you looking for?
Find it here
Drivers and manuals for my printer Software and Documentation disc:
The Software and Documentation disc contains manuals, drivers, and
software for the printer. You can use the Software and
Documentation disc to install drivers and software, and refer to
manuals.
Readme files may be included on your Software and Documentation
disc to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to the
printer or advanced technical reference material for experienced
users or technicians.
How to set up my printer
Setup Guide
How to use my printer
Safety information
Warranty information
Important Information
WARNING:
• Read and follow all safety instructions in the Important
Information prior to setting up and operating the printer.
Express Service Code and Service The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located inside the front
Tag
cover of the printer.
Service Tag
ABCD123
Express Service Code
01234567890
Latest drivers for my printer
Visit www.dell.com/support.
Documentation for my printer
Answers to technical service and
support questions
Visit www.dell.com/support. Select your region, and fill in the
requested details to access help tools and information.
www.dell.com/support provides several online tools, including:
• Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from
technicians, and online courses
• Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as the
print drivers
• Customer Care — Contact information, order status, warranty, and
repair information
• Downloads — Drivers
• Manuals— Printer documentation and product specifications
22
Finding Information
Product Features
This chapter describes the product features and indicates their links.
Dell Document Hub App
Easily access and share documents, images and
digital content with the Dell Document Hub App.
This innovative cloud collaboration solution
connects your printer and devices to popular cloud
services, providing a flexible and secure way to
collaborate from virtually anywhere. Using your
computer or mobile device, you can search file
across multiple cloud services simultaneously to
print documents or you can scan documents
directly to the cloud using the app. For
downloading the app, please visit Microsoft®
Windows Store, Google® Play Store and Apple® App
Store. For more information about using Dell
Document Hub, see the FAQs in
Dell.com/documenthub.
Dell Print Management Tool
(Dell S2825cdn)
Dell Print Management Tool is a program that
monitorT and informT you of the printer status and
allowT you to customize the printer settings. The
program also notifJFT you of the firmware/
software updates. Dell Print Management Tool is
included on your Software and Documentation disc
and is installed with the manuals, drivers, and
software for the printer. For more information,
open the program and click 



on the top right of
the main window to see the FAQs.
Dell Printer Hub
(Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw)
Dell Printer Hub is a program that monitorT and
informT you of the printer status and allowT you to
customize the printer settings. The program also
notifJFT you of the firmware/software updates. For
convenient use, you can access the Dell Document
Hub from the Dell Printer Hub. Dell Printer Hub is
included on your Software and Documentation
disc and is installed with the manuals, drivers, and
software for the printer. For more information,
open the program and click
on the top right of
the main window to see the FAQs.
Converting and storing with Dell Document
Hub
(Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw)
You can scan hard copy documents and store
them directly in your preferred cloud storage
service with the Dell Document Hub. You can also
convert hard copy documents into editable digital
content before sending them to the cloud storage.
See "Scanning the Document Using Optical
Character Recognition (OCR)."
Product Features
23
Printing with Dell Document Hub
(Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw)
You can easily locate and print documents stored
in cloud storage with the Dell Document Hub. You
can also search for files across multiple clouds
storage services simultaneously.
See "Searching for and Printing Files."
USB Direct Print
You can print files directly from a USB flash drive
without requiring you to start your computer and a
program with the USB Direct Print feature.
See "Printing From USB Flash Drive."
Scan to Email
ID Copy
You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side
of a single sheet of paper in its original size by a
simple operation with the ID Copy feature.
See "Using the ID Copy."
You can send scanned data by e-mail as an
attachment with the Scan to Email feature. After
scanning, select destination e-mail addresses from
the address book on the printer or server or enter
the address from the touch panel of the printer.
See "Sending a Scanned Data via E-Mail."
Scan to Network Folder
Scan to USB
You can transfer scanned data to a PC or a server
via Server Message Block (SMB) or FTP without
software. Although prior registration of the
destination FTP server or PC on the address book is
required, it helps save your time.
See "Scanning to a Computer or Server With
SMB/FTP."
You don't need a PC to save scanned data to a USB
flash drive with the Scan to USB feature. Specify the
USB flash drive inserted into the printer's port as a
data saving location when you scan data.
See "Scanning to a USB Flash Drive."
24
Product Features
Scanning From the Document Glass
You can scan the pages of a book or a brochure
from the document glass.
See "Making Copies From the Document Glass."
Scanning From the Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF)
You can scan pieces of unbound paper using the
DADF.
See "Making Copies From the DADF."
Product Features
25
Printer Overview
Front and Rear View
Front View
12
11
10
Output Tray Extension
Right Side Cover
Front USB Port
Front Cover
Operator Panel
Tray1
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
10 Optional 550-Sheet Feeder (Tray2)
Drum Cartridges
11
Waste Toner Box
12 Toner Cartridges
26
Printer Overview
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
Rear View
Phone Connector
"Blue" Plug
Wall Jack Connector
Duplex Unit
Ethernet Port
Fusing Unit
USB Port
Rear Cover
Power Connector
Printer Overview
27
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
DADF Cover
Document Feeder Tray
Document Guides
Document Stopper
DADF Chute Cover
Document Output Tray
Document Glass
DADF Feed Rollers
NOTE:
• Pull out the document stopper to prevent the document from falling off the printer.
Operator Panel
Dell H625cdw/Dell H825cdw
14
13
Dell S2825cdn
28
Printer Overview
12
11
10
1
14
13
12
11
(Home) button
Moves to the Home screen.
(Log In/Out) button
Logs out if pressed while the user is logged in.
Touch Panel
Specifies the settings by directly tapping the screen.
Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.
Ready/Error LED
Shows a green light when the printer is ready and a blinking green
light when data is being received.
Shows an amber light when an error occurs and a blinking amber
light when an unrecoverable print error occurs.
Number Pad
Enters numbers and characters.
(Wi-Fi) button*
Shows a white light when the Wi-Fi® is activated and blinks in certain
conditions. See "Status of Wi-Fi Button LED."
(Redial/Pause) button
Re-dials a telephone number.
Inserts a pause into a telephone number. When the
(Redial/Pause) button is pressed, "-" appears on the touch panel.
(Copy) button
Starts copying the document. Effective only from the Home screen
while you are logged in to the printer.
(Power) button
Turns on and off the printer. Also enters or exits the Power Saver
mode. When the printer is not used for a while, it enters the Power
Saver mode to reduce power consumption. The white light will flash
in a breathing pattern (gradually flashes on and off) when the Power
Saver mode is active.
10
11
(NFC) reader*
(Speed Dial 1/
Speed Dial 2) button
12
13
14
(Delete) button
(Job Status) button
(Information) button
Starts communication between the printer and an NFC card or a
mobile device with the NFC function when the card or the device is
tapped to or waved over the reader.
Dials the number registered as "001" or "002" respectively of the FAX
Speed Dial. Effective only when the Home screen is displayed.
Deletes numbers and characters.
Moves to the Job Status screen. From this screen, you can check
or cancel active jobs.
Moves to the Information screen. You can access various
information and settings menu, check consumable levels and
network status, and print various types of reports and lists.
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
NOTE:
• Moving to a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the current entry or setting.
Make sure to select OK to save the current entry or setting.
Printer Overview
29
Status of Wi-Fi Button LED
(Wi-Fi) LED
Off
Printer Status
Wi-Fi has been turned off.
Connecting to the network via Ethernet cable
Entering the power saver mode
On
Wireless link established
Blinking
Searching/Connecting with wireless LAN access point or router
Blinking slowly
Wi-Fi is turned on but not connected to an access point or router.
Optional Accessory
The optional 550-sheet feeder is available for the printer.
To install the optional 550-sheet feeder, refer to the installation instruction that comes
with the optional 550-sheet feeder.
30
Printer Overview
2
Setting Up the Printer
Overview of the Printer Setup
32
Preparing to Set Up the Printer
33
Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line
34
Turning On/Off the Printer
37
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
44
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
61
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing
System (CUPS)
72
Setting the IP Address
80
31
Overview of the Printer Setup
The following are the procedures necessary to set up the printer.
Hardware preparations/Initial settings
"Preparing to Set Up the Printer"
"Turning On/Off the Printer"
"Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel"
Connections/Printer setup
"Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line"
"Connecting Your Printer to a Computer"
"Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices"
32
Overview of the Printer Setup
Preparing to Set Up the Printer
Space Requirements
Provide enough room to open the printer trays, covers, and optional accessory, and for
proper ventilation.
180 mm/
7.09 inches
500 mm/
19.69 inches
220 mm/8.66 inches
300 mm/
11.81 inches
420 mm/16.54 inches
180 mm/7.09 inches
499 mm/19.65 inches
250 mm/9.84 inches
Securing the Printer
To protect the printer from theft, you can use a Kensington lock.
Attach the Kensington lock to the security slot of the printer.
Security Slot
Security Slot
Refer to the operating instructions supplied with the Kensington lock.
Preparing to Set Up the Printer
33
Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line
CAUTION:
• Do not connect the printer directly to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL). This may damage the
printer. To use a DSL, you are required to use an appropriate DSL filter. Contact your service
provider for the DSL filter.
Connecting the Printer to the Wall Jack
To connect the printer to a telephone line, connect a telephone line cord into the wall
jack connector on the rear of the printer. Connect the other end of the cord into an
active wall jack.
To the wall jack
If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany, Sweden,
Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France, and Switzerland), and a "Yellow" terminator is
supplied, perform the following procedure:
1 Remove the "Blue" plug from the phone connector.
"Blue" plug
2 Insert the "Yellow" terminator into the phone connector.
34
Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line
"Yellow" terminator
Connecting the Printer to a Modem
You can connect the printer to a computer with a modem on the same telephone line as
the printer.
Make sure that the modem is connected to an active wall jack connector, and then
connect a telephone line cord into the phone connector on the modem. Connect the
other end of the cord into the wall jack connector on the rear of the printer.
To an active
wall jack
Phone
connector
Wall jack connector
NOTE:
• When using the fax function of the printer, turn off the fax-receive feature of the computer
modem.
• Do not use the computer modem if the printer is sending or receiving a fax.
• To fax via the computer modem, follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and
fax program.
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
If you share a telephone line with voice calls and fax, you can connect a telephone or an
answering machine to the printer to take the voice calls.
1 Make sure that a telephone line is connected to the printer.
See "Connecting the Printer to the Wall Jack."
2 Remove the "Blue" plug from the phone connector.
Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line
35
"Blue" plug
3 Connect a telephone or answering machine line cord into the phone connector on
the rear of the printer. Connect the other end of the cord into an external telephone
or answering machine.
To an external telephone
or answering machine
36
Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line
Turning On/Off the Printer
NOTE:
• The images used in this chapter are those of the Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw unless otherwise
mentioned.
Turning On the Printer
WARNING:
• Do not use extension cords or power strips.
• The printer should not be connected to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system.
1 Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear of the printer, and then
to an electrical outlet.
2 Press the
(Power) button on the operator panel.
Turning On/Off the Printer
37
Turning Off the Printer
NOTE:
• The data in the memory is cleared when the printer is turned off.
Press and hold the
panel.
(Power) button and select Power Off displayed on the operator
Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel
You need to set the printer language, country, clock date, time, and fax settings when
you turn on the printer for the first time.
When you turn the printer on, the wizard screen to perform the initial setup appears on
the touch panel. Perform the following procedure to set the initial settings.
NOTE:
• If you do not start configuring the initial settings, the printer restarts in 3 minutes, and the Home
screen appears on the touch panel. After that, you can set the following initial setup by enabling
the Power On Wizard on the touch panel from:
The
(Information) button
Tools tab
Admin Settings
System Settings
General
Power On Wizard.
You can also set the same setting using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."
1 Turn on the printer.
2 Tap
until desired language appears, and then tap the desired language.
3 Tap Next.
4 Tap Date & Time.
Geographic Region
Time Zone
Africa
(UTC) Accra, Bamako, Dakar, Nouakchott
(UTC) Casablanca
(UTC +01:00) Algiers, Douala, Libreville, Luanda
(UTC +01:00) Tunis
(UTC +01:00) Windhoek
(UTC +02:00) Cairo
(UTC +02:00) Harare, Johannesburg, Kinshasa, Tripoli
(UTC +03:00) Addis Ababa, Khartoum, Mogadishu, Nairobi
38
Turning On/Off the Printer
Geographic Region
Time Zone
Americas
(UTC -10:00) Adak
(UTC -09:00) Alaska
(UTC -08:00) Pacific Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -08:00) Tijuana
(UTC -07:00) Arizona, Dawson Creek, Sonora
(UTC -07:00) Chihuahua, Mazatlan
(UTC -07:00) Mountain Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -06:00) Cancun, Mexico City, Monterrey
(UTC -06:00) Central America
(UTC -06:00) Central Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -06:00) Saskatchewan
(UTC -05:00) Atikokan, Resolute
(UTC -05:00) Bogota, Lima, Panama, Quito
(UTC -05:00) Cayman Islands, Jamaica, Port-au-Prince
(UTC -05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -05:00) Grand Turk
(UTC -05:00) Havana
(UTC -04:30) Caracas
(UTC -04:00) Asuncion
(UTC -04:00) Atlantic Time (Canada)
(UTC -04:00) Blanc-Sablon
(UTC -04:00) Caribbean Islands
(UTC -04:00) Cuiaba
(UTC -04:00) Georgetown, La Paz, Manaus
(UTC -04:00) Thule
(UTC -03:30) St. John's
(UTC -03:00) Brasilia, Cayenne, Paramaribo
(UTC -03:00) Buenos Aires
(UTC -03:00) Greenland
(UTC -03:00) Miquelon
(UTC -03:00) Montevideo
(UTC -02:00) Noronha
Antarctica
(UTC -04:00) Palmer Archipelago, Santiago
(UTC -03:00) Rothera
(UTC +03:00) Syowa
(UTC +06:00) Mawson, Vostok
(UTC +07:00) Davis
(UTC +08:00) Casey
(UTC +10:00) Dumont d'Urville
(UTC +12:00) McMurdo
Turning On/Off the Printer
39
Geographic Region
Time Zone
Asia
(UTC +02:00) Amman
(UTC +02:00) Beirut
(UTC +02:00) Damascus
(UTC +02:00) Jerusalem
(UTC +02:00) Nicosia
(UTC +02:00) Palestine
(UTC +03:00) Aden, Baghdad, Qatar, Riyadh
(UTC +03:30) Tehran
(UTC +04:00) Baku
(UTC +04:00) Dubai, Muscat, Tbilisi
(UTC +04:00) Yerevan
(UTC +04:30) Kabul
(UTC +05:00) Aqtau, Aqtobe, Ashgabat, Samarkand
(UTC +05:00) Ekaterinburg
(UTC +05:00) Karachi
(UTC +05:30) Colombo, Kolkata
(UTC +05:45) Kathmandu
(UTC +06:00) Almaty, Bishkek, Dhaka, Thimphu
(UTC +06:00) Novosibirsk, Omsk
(UTC +06:30) Yangon (Rangoon)
(UTC +07:00) Bangkok, Ho Chi Minh, Hovd, Jakarta
(UTC +07:00) Krasnoyarsk
(UTC +08:00) Chongqing, Hong Kong, Shanghai
(UTC +08:00) Irkutsk
(UTC +08:00) Kuala Lumpur, Makassar, Manila, Singapore
(UTC +08:00) Taipei
(UTC +08:00) Ulaan Baatar
(UTC +09:00) Dili, Jayapura
(UTC +09:00) Pyongyang
(UTC +09:00) Seoul
(UTC +09:00) Tokyo
(UTC +09:00) Yakutsk
(UTC +10:00) Sakhalin, Vladivostok
(UTC +11:00) Magadan
(UTC +12:00) Anadyr, Kamchatka
Atlantic Ocean
(UTC -04:00) Bermuda
(UTC -04:00) Stanley
(UTC -02:00) South Georgia Island
(UTC -01:00) Azores, Scoresbysund
(UTC -01:00) Cape Verde
(UTC) Reykjavik
40
Turning On/Off the Printer
Geographic Region
Time Zone
Australia
(UTC +08:00) Perth
(UTC +08:45) Eucla
(UTC +09:30) Adelaide
(UTC +09:30) Darwin
(UTC +10:00) Brisbane, Lindeman
(UTC +10:00) Hobart, Melbourne, Sydney
(UTC +10:30) Lord Howe Island
Europe
(UTC) Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London
(UTC +01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin, Rome, Stockholm, Vienna
(UTC +01:00) Belgrade, Bratislava, Budapest, Prague
(UTC +01:00) Brussels, Copenhagen, Madrid, Paris
(UTC +01:00) Sarajevo, Skopje, Warsaw, Zagreb
(UTC +02:00) Athens, Bucharest, Istanbul
(UTC +02:00) Helsinki, Kiev, Riga, Sofia
(UTC +02:00) Kaliningrad, Minsk
(UTC +03:00) Moscow
(UTC +04:00) Samara
Indian Ocean
(UTC +03:00) Antananarivo, Comoro Islands, Mayotte
(UTC +04:00) Mahe, Reunion
(UTC +04:00) Mauritius
(UTC +05:00) Kerguelen, Maldives
(UTC +06:00) Chagos
(UTC +06:30) Cocos Islands
(UTC +07:00) Christmas Island
Pacific Ocean
(UTC -11:00) Midway Island, Niue, Samoa
(UTC -10:00) Cook Islands, Hawaii, Tahiti
(UTC -09:30) Marquesas Islands
(UTC -09:00) Gambier Islands
(UTC -08:00) Pitcairn Islands
(UTC -06:00) Easter Island
(UTC -06:00) Galapagos Islands
(UTC +09:00) Palau
(UTC +10:00) Guam, Port Moresby, Saipan
(UTC +11:00) Efate, Guadalcanal, Kosrae
(UTC +11:30) Norfolk Island
(UTC +12:00) Auckland
(UTC +12:00) Fiji, Marshall Islands
(UTC +12:45) Chatham
(UTC +13:00) Tongatapu
(UTC +14:00) Kiritimati
5 Tap
until the desired geographic region appears, and then tap the desired
geographic region.
6 Tap
until the desired time zone appears, and then tap the desired time zone.
Turning On/Off the Printer
41
7 Tap OK
Date.
8 Select a date format from the menu displayed by selecting Format.
9 After tapping the box under Year, tap – or +, or use the number pad to enter the
desired value.
Repeat this step to enter the desired value for Month and Day.
10 Tap OK
Time.
11 Select the time format from 12 Hour or 24 Hour. If you select 12 Hour, select AM
or PM.
12 After tapping the box under Hour, use the number pad to enter the desired value.
Repeat this step to enter the desired value for Minute.
13 Tap OK
Next.
14 Perform either of the following:
To set Fax settings, select Yes, Setup FAX and perform the following procedure:
a Enter the fax number of the printer using the number pad.
b Tap Country.
c Tap
until the desired country appears, and then tap the desired country.
The default paper size is automatically set when you select a country.
42
Australia
A4
Austria
A4
Belgium
A4
Canada
Letter
Colombia
Letter
Denmark
A4
Finland
A4
France
A4
Germany
A4
Ireland
A4
Italy
A4
Malaysia
A4
Mexico
Letter
Netherlands
A4
New Zealand
A4
Norway
A4
Singapore
A4
South Africa
A4
Spain
A4
Sweden
A4
Switzerland
A4
Thailand
A4
United Kingdom
A4
United States
Letter
Turning On/Off the Printer
Unknown
Letter
d Tap Next.
To end the settings, select No, I'll Do It Later.
15 When the Setup Complete (Congratulations, setup is complete.)
screen appears, tap OK.
The printer restarts.
Turning On/Off the Printer
43
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
You can connect the printer directly to your computer with USB, or connect the printer
to a wireless or wired network.
NOTE:
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Overview
The following are the simple procedures recommended to connect the printer.
Wireless connection
Necessary preparations
Check the settings of your access point or wireless router.
Windows®
Dell Printer Easy Install
Macintosh
WPS-PBC settings
Drivers and
software installation
"Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install
(Windows® Only)"
"Connecting With WPS"
"Installing the
Software for Macintosh Computers"
For wireless connection procedures other than the above, see "Connecting to a Wireless
Network."
44
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
Wired connection
(Ethernet or USB)
Necessary preparations
Connect an Ethernet cable or a USB cable into the port on the rear of the printer.
"Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network"
"Connecting to a Computer With USB"
Windows®
Dell Printer Easy Install
Macintosh
Drivers and software installation
"Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install
(Windows® Only)"
"Installing the Software for Macintosh
Computers"
Connecting to a Wireless Network
Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows® Only)
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc in your computer.
Alternatively, go to www.dell.com/support, enter the Service Tag of your printer,
download the latest software and driver, and then open the file that you
downloaded.
NOTE:
• Make sure that there is no cable connected between the printer and your computer.
2 On the Dell Printer Easy Install window, click Next. Dell Printer Easy Install begins to
search for your printer.
3 Wait for Dell Printer Easy Install wizard to find your printer.
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
45
4 After the printer is found, click Install to complete the setup.
Connecting With WPS
WPS-PBC and WPS-PIN are simple methods to setup wireless connection.
For WPS-PBC, press the button provided on your access point or wireless router, and
then perform WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when
the access point supports WPS.
For WPS-PIN, enter PIN assignments to your printer and computer. This setting,
performed on an access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless
router support WPS.
NOTE:
• This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
• Make sure to connect the printer to a wireless network and disconnect the Ethernet cable.
• Before starting WPS-PBC, check where the WPS button (button name may vary) is located on the
wireless LAN access point. For details about WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer
to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN access point.
• For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless
LAN access point.
WPS-PBC (Using the Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS) Button)
1 Press and hold the
(Wi-Fi) button for more than 2 seconds.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
NOTE:
• If you press the
(Wi-Fi) button for less than 1 second, the Wi-Fi | WPS screen appears.
• Make sure that the message Push WPS Button on router is displayed, and then start the
WPS-PBC on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) within 2 minutes.
2 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
After the setting is complete, install the software. See "Installing the Software for
Windows® Computers" or "Installing the Software for Macintosh Computers."
WPS-PBC (Using the Touch Panel)
When using the
(Wi-Fi) button:
1 Press the
(Wi-Fi) button.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
2 Tap WPS (Connect via PBC).
3 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
When using the
(Information) button:
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Network Wi-Fi
Push Button Configuration Start Configuration.
WPS Setup
3 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
After the setting is complete, install the software. See "Installing the Software for
46
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
Windows® Computers" or "Installing the Software for Macintosh Computers."
WPS-PIN
1 Press the
(Wi-Fi) button.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
2 Tap WPS (Connect via PIN).
3 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
After the setting is complete, install the software. See "Installing the Software for
Windows® Computers" or "Installing the Software for Macintosh Computers."
NOTE:
• Write down the eight-digit PIN code displayed on the touch panel. To print the PIN code, tap
Print PIN Code.
• Make sure that the message Operate Wireless Router is displayed, and then enter the PIN
code into the wireless LAN access point (Registrar).
Manually Connecting to a Wireless Network
Connect to the wireless network using the SSID of your access point or wireless router.
For details about the SSID of your access point or wireless router, contact your network
administrator.
Auto SSID Setup
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Network Wi-Fi.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3 Tap Wi-Fi Setup Wizard.
The printer searches for access points on the wireless network.
4 Tap
until the desired access point appears, and then select the access point.
If the desired access point does not appear, proceed to "Manual SSID Setup."
NOTE:
• Some SSIDs are hidden and may not be displayed. If the SSID is not detected, turn on SSID
broadcast from the router.
5 Tap Next.
6 Enter the WEP key or passphrase.
If the encryption type of the selected access point is WEP in step 4:
a Tap the WEP Key text box, and then enter the WEP key.
b Tap OK.
If the encryption type of the selected access point is WPA™, WPA2™, or Mixed in
step 4:
a Tap the Passphrase text box, and then enter the passphrase.
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
47
b Tap OK.
NOTE:
• A passphrase is an encryption key and may be described on access points or routers. For
details, refer to the manual supplied with the access point or router.
7 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
After the setting is complete, install the software. See "Installing the Software for
Windows® Computers" or "Installing the Software for Macintosh Computers."
Manual SSID Setup
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Network Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Setup
Wizard.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3 Select the Manual SSID Setup check box, and then tap Next.
4 Enter the SSID, and then tap Next.
5 Select the network mode from Infrastructure and Ad-hoc according to your
environment, and then tap Next.
If you select Infrastructure, proceed to step 6.
If you select Ad-hoc, proceed to step 7.
NOTE:
• When Wi-Fi Direct is set to Enable, you cannot select Ad-hoc.
6 Select the encryption type from No Security, Mixed mode PSK, WPA2-PSK-AES,
or WEP.
If you do not set security for your wireless network:
a Tap
until No Security appears, and then tap No Security.
b Tap OK.
If you use Mixed mode PSK or WPA2-PSK-AES encryption:
a Tap
until Mixed mode PSK or WPA2-PSK-AES appears, and then tap the
desired encryption type.
b Tap the Passphrase text box, and then enter the passphrase.
c Tap OK.
If you use WEP encryption:
a Tap
until WEP appears, and then tap WEP.
b Tap the WEP Key text box, and then enter the WEP key.
c Tap Transmit Key, and then select the desired transmit key from Auto or WEP
Key 1 to WEP Key 4.
d Tap OK.
48
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
Proceed to step 8.
NOTE:
• A passphrase is an encryption key and may be described on access points or routers. For
details, refer to the manual supplied with the access point or router.
7 Select the encryption type from No Security or WEP.
If you do not set security for your wireless network:
a Tap
until No Security appears, and then tap No Security.
b Tap OK.
To use WEP encryption:
a Tap
until WEP appears, and then tap WEP.
b Tap the WEP Key text box, and then enter the WEP key.
c Tap Transmit Key, and then select the desired transmit key from WEP Key 1 to
WEP Key 4.
d Tap OK.
8 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
After the setting is complete, install the software. See "Installing the Software for
Windows® Computers" or "Installing the Software for Macintosh Computers."
Changing the Wireless Settings
To change the wireless settings of the printer from your computer, start the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."
You can also set the same settings using the Software and Documentation disc.
Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network
Connecting the Ethernet Cable
To connect the printer to an Ethernet network, connect an Ethernet cable into the
Ethernet port on the rear of the printer, and then connect the other end of the cable into
an Ethernet outlet or a hub.
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
49
Ethernet outlet/hub
NOTE:
• To connect to a wireless network, make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable. The printer will be
connected to the same wireless network that the computer used is currently connected.
Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows® Only)
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc in your computer.
Alternatively, go to www.dell.com/support, enter the Service Tag of your printer,
download the latest software and driver, and then open the file that you
downloaded.
NOTE:
• Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer using an Ethernet cable.
2 On the Dell Printer Easy Install window, click Next. Dell Printer Easy Install begins to
search for your printer.
3 Wait for Dell Printer Easy Install wizard to find your printer.
4 After the printer is found, select the printer, and then click Finish to complete the
setup.
Configuring With Other Methods
For details, see "Installing the Software for Windows® Computers" or "Installing the
Software for Macintosh Computers."
50
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
Connecting to a Computer With USB
Connecting the USB Cable
To connect the printer directly to the computer, connect the smaller USB connector
into the USB port on the rear of the printer, and then connect the other end of the cable
into a USB port of the computer.
CAUTION:
• Do not connect the printer to a USB hub.
NOTE:
• Make sure to match the USB symbol on the cable plug with the USB symbol on the printer.
Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows® Only)
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc in your computer.
Alternatively, go to www.dell.com/support, enter the Service Tag of your printer,
download the latest software and driver, and then open the file that you
downloaded.
NOTE:
• Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer using a USB cable.
2 On the Dell Printer Easy Install window, click Next. Dell Printer Easy Install begins to
search for your printer.
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
51
3 Wait for Dell Printer Easy Install wizard to find and install your printer.
Configuring With Other Methods
For details, see "Installing the Software for Windows® Computers" or "Installing the
Software for Macintosh Computers."
Installing the Software for Windows® Computers
Installing the Software and Print Drivers with Dell Printer Easy
Install
Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer.
If the Software and Documentation disc does not start, perform the following.
The following procedure uses Windows® 7/Windows® 10 as an example.
1 Click Start All Programs Accessories Run.
For Windows® 10: Right-click the Start button, and then click Run.
2 Enter D:\setup_assist.exe (D is the drive letter of the optical drive), and then
click OK.
3 In the Dell Printer Easy Install window, click Setup.
4 Select a connection method to the printer.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions until the Ready to Print! screen appears.
6 Click Finish.
If necessary, click Print Test Page to verify installation.
Installing the Software and Print Drivers When the Printer is
Connected to the Network or Computer
If the printer connection via USB/Ethernet/Wireless is already configured, perform the
following to install the print driver and software. You can install the driver for a printer
52
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
with USB connection or network connection.
NOTE:
• To install the print driver with network connection, you need the IP address that is assigned to the
printer. To check the IP address of the printer, perform one of the procedures in "Verifying the IP
Settings."
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Installing the Printer Control Language (PCL), PostScript (PS), and Fax
Driver with USB Cable Connection
NOTE:
• If you are connecting the printer to a network, see "Installing the Printer Control Language (PCL),
PostScript (PS), and Fax Driver with Network Connection."
1 In the Dell Printer Easy Install window, click Connect.
2 Select USB Cable Connection, and then click Next.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions until the Ready to Print! screen appears.
4 Click Finish.
If necessary, click Print Test Page to verify installation.
Installing the XML Paper Specification (XPS) Print Driver with USB Cable
Connection
NOTE:
• XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver is supported on Windows Vista® or later.
• If you are using Windows Vista® or Windows Server® 2008, you need to install Service Pack 2 or
later, and then the Windows® Platform Update (KB971644). The update (KB971644) is available for
download from Windows® Update.
The following procedure uses Windows® 7 and Windows® 10 as examples.
For Windows® 7:
1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H625cdw_H825cdw_S2825cdn.zip (D
is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start
Devices and Printers
Add a printer.
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
53
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.
NOTE:
• If you are logged on as an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your
administrator to continue the desired action.
3 Click Add a local printer.
4 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.
5 Click Have Disk.
The Install From Disk dialog box is displayed.
6 Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.
7 Click OK.
8 Select the printer name, and then click Next.
If you want to change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box, and then click Next.
9 Select either Do not share this printer or Share this printer so that others on your
network can find and use it, and then click Next.
10 When the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
If you want to use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box, and then click Next.
11 Click Finish.
For Windows® 10:
1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_8\XPS-V4_H625cdw_H825cdw_S2825cdn.zip (D is the
drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel.
3 Click Hardware and Sound
Devices and Printers
Add a printer.
4 Click The printer that I want isn’t listed.
5 Click Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings
Have Disk.
Next
Next
The Install From Disk dialog box is displayed.
6 Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.
7 Click OK.
8 Select the printer name, and then click Next.
If you want to change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box, and then click Next.
9 When the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
If you want to use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box.
10 Click Finish.
54
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
Installing the Printer Control Language (PCL), PostScript (PS), and Fax
Driver with Network Connection
NOTE:
• To use the printer in a Linux environment, you need to install a Linux driver. See "Installing Print
Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)."
1 In the Dell Printer Easy Install window, click Connect.
2 Select Wireless or Ethernet Connection, and then click Next.
NOTE:
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions until the Ready to Print! screen appears.
4 Click Finish to exit the wizard.
If necessary, click Print Test Page to verify installation.
Installing the XML Paper Specification (XPS) Print Driver with Network
Connection
For Windows® 7:
1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H625cdw_H825cdw_S2825cdn.zip (D
is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start
Devices and Printers
Add a printer.
3 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
NOTE:
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
4 Select a printer, and then click Next.
Or
Click The printer that I want isn't listed.
If you select the printer, proceed to step 7.
If you click The printer that I want isn't listed, proceed to step 5.
5 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name, and then click Next.
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
55
6 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, enter the IP address for Hostname or IP
address, and then click Next.
NOTE:
• If the User Account Control dialog box appears and if you are the administrator of the
computer, click Yes. Otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.
7 Click Have Disk.
The Install From Disk dialog box is displayed.
8 Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.
9 Click OK.
10 Select the printer name, and then click Next.
If you want to change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box, and then click Next.
11 Select either Do not share this printer or Share this printer so that others on your
network can find and use it, and then click Next.
12 When the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
If you want to use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box, and then click Next.
13 Click Finish.
For Windows® 10:
1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_8\XPS-V4_H625cdw_H825cdw_S2825cdn.zip (D is the
drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel.
3 Click Hardware and Sound
Devices and Printers
Add a printer.
4 Click The printer that I want isn’t listed.
5 Click Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings
Have Disk.
The Install From Disk dialog box is displayed.
Next
Next
6 Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.
7 Click OK.
8 Select the printer name, and then click Next.
If you want to change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box, and then click Next.
9 When the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
If you want to use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box.
10 Click Finish.
56
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
Setting Up for Web Services on Devices (WSD)
Adding Roles of Printer Services (Windows Server® Operating Systems
Only)
When you use Windows Server® operating system, you need to add the roles of print
services to the operating system.
For Windows Server® 2008 R2:
1 Click Start Administrative Tools
Server Manager.
2 Select Add Roles from the Action menu.
3 Select the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window in
the Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next
Next.
4 Select the Print Server check box, and then click Next
Install.
Installing a Print Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard
The following procedure uses Windows® 7/Windows® 10 as an example.
1 Click Start Devices and Printers.
For Windows® 10: Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel
Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers Add a printer.
For Windows® 10: Proceed to step 3.
2 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
NOTE:
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
3 In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then click Next.
NOTE:
• In the list of available printers, the Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer is displayed in the
form of http://IP address/ws/.
• If no Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer is displayed in the list, enter the printer's IP
address to create a Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer. To enter the printer's IP address,
perform the following procedure.
For Windows Server® 2008 R2, to create a Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer, you must
be a member of Administrators group.
1 Click The printer that I want isn't listed.
2 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname, and then click Next.
3 Select Web Services Device from Device type.
4 Enter the printer's IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box, and then click Next.
• Before installing the driver using the Add Printer wizard on Windows Server® 2008 R2 or
Windows® 7, perform one of the following:
- Establish the Internet connection so that Windows® Update can scan your computer.
- Add the print driver to your computer.
4 If prompted, install the print driver on your computer. If you are prompted for an
administrator password or confirmation, enter the password or provide
confirmation.
5 Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click Finish.
6 Print a test page to verify print installation.
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
57
a Click Start Devices and Printers.
For Windows® 10: Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel
Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers.
b Right-click the icon for the printer you just created, and then click Printer
properties.
c On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
Installing the Software for Macintosh Computers
Installing the Software and Print Drivers
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc on the Macintosh computer, and then
click the CD icon.
2 Double-click your printer icon, and then click Continue.
3 When the popup dialog box prompts you to confirm the program included in the
installation package, click Continue.
4 Click Continue on the Important Information screen.
5 Select a language for the Software License Agreement screen.
6 After reading Software License Agreement, click Continue.
7 If you agree to the terms of Software License Agreement, click Agree to continue
the installation process.
8 Specify the installation location, and then click Continue.
9 Click Install.
If you want to select a custom installation, click Customize and select items that you
want to install.
10 Enter the administrator's name and password, and then click Install Software
Continue Installation.
11 Click Log Out or Close.
Adding a Printer Using USB Connection
The following procedure uses OS X 10.10 as an example.
1 Turn on the printer.
2 Connect the USB cable to the printer and the Macintosh computer.
Adding a Printer Using IP Printing
The following procedure uses OS X 10.10 as an example.
1 Turn on the printer.
2 Make sure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected.
58
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
If you use wired connection, connect the printer to the network via an Ethernet
cable.
If you use wireless connection, make sure that the wireless connection is configured
properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer.
NOTE:
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
3 Open the System Preferences, and then click Printers & Scanners.
4 Click the Plus (+) sign, select Add Printer or Scanner, and then click IP.
5 Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol.
6 Enter the IP address for the printer in the Address area.
7 Select Dell Color MFP H625cdw, Dell Color MFP H825cdw, or Dell Color MFP
S2825cdn for Use.
NOTE:
• When printing is set up using IP printing feature, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do
not need to specify it.
8 Click Add.
9 Specify the options that have been installed on the printer, and then click Continue.
10 Make sure that the printer is displayed in the Printers & Scanners dialog box.
Adding a Printer Using Bonjour
The following procedure uses OS X 10.10 as an example.
1 Turn on the printer.
2 Make sure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected.
If you use wired connection, connect the printer to the network via an Ethernet
cable.
If you use wireless connection, make sure that the wireless connection is configured
properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer.
NOTE:
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
3 Open the System Preferences, and then click Printers & Scanners.
4 Click the Plus (+) sign, select Add Printer or Scanner, and then click Default.
5 Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list.
6 Name and Use are automatically entered.
NOTE:
• If AirPrint Printer is selected for Print Using (or Use), select Dell Color MFP H625cdw, Dell
Color MFP H825cdw, or Dell Color MFP S2825cdn manually.
7 Click Add.
8 Specify the options that have been installed on the printer, and then click Continue.
9 Make sure that the printer is displayed in the Printers & Scanners dialog box.
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
59
Configuring With Optional Accessories
On the driver, specify the optional accessories that have been installed on the printer to
enable features associated with those accessories.
1 Open the System Preferences, and then click Printers & Scanners.
2 Select the printer in the Printers list, and then click Options & Supplies.
3 Select Options, and select the options that have been installed on the printer, and
then click OK.
60
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
You can connect the printer directly to your mobile devices, such as computers, smart
phones, and tablets, and then you can print or scan documents, photos, web pages, or
e-mail quickly and easily.
Overview
The following shows the compatibility between the mobile printing services and
operating systems.
Windows®
Macintosh
iOS
Android™
Wi-Fi Direct®
Dell Document Hub
Tap to Print/Scan
AirPrint™
Google Cloud Print™
Mopria™ Print
( : compatible, Blank: not compatible)
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct allows your mobile devices to connect to the printer directly via a Wi-Fi
network. With Wi-Fi Direct, you can print documents, photos, or e-mail on your mobile
devices directly without an access point or a wireless router.
NOTE:
•
•
•
•
Wi-Fi Direct is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
The maximum number of mobile devices that can be connected via the Wi-Fi Direct network is 3.
You cannot connect your mobile device to the Internet via the printer’s Wi-Fi Direct network.
Depending on the mobile device, the channel used to connect the mobile device to the printer via
Wi-Fi Direct may differ from the channel used by the printer to connect to a network via Wi-Fi
infrastructure mode. In such a case, simultaneous connection with Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi
infrastructure mode may not work properly.
• The printer connected with Wi-Fi Direct supports the following protocols; LPD, Port9100, WSD*,
Bonjour (mDNS), SNMPv1/v2c, Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
* WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct
To use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to first set up the Wi-Fi Direct settings from the operator
panel of the printer. To connect the mobile device to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct, select
the SSID of the printer from the list of wireless networks on the mobile device and enter
the passphrase necessary for connection.
Setting Up the Printer
NOTE:
• You can set the same setting using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer
Configuration Web Tool."
1 Press the
(Wi-Fi) button.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
61
2 Tap Wi-Fi Direct.
3 In the Wi-Fi Direct menu, tap Wi-Fi Direct
Enable
OK.
If a popup message about the mobile devices is displayed, tap Close.
4 Tap Group Role
Group Owner
OK
Paired Device.
5 Make sure that no device is connected with the Wi-Fi Direct connection.
NOTE:
• When other mobile device is connected, the device name and Connected are displayed on
Paired Device, and you cannot use the Wi-Fi Direct connection. Disconnect the other
mobile device from the Wi-Fi Direct network. See "Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network."
6 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
7 Repeat steps 1 and 2 after the printer is restarted, and then tap Group Owner.
8 Tap SSID and Passphrase to check what the SSID and passphrase are.
NOTE:
• To check the printer's SSID and passphrase, you can also print the list by tapping Print
Passphrase under the Passphrase menu.
Connecting the Mobile Device
The following procedure uses Windows® 7, Windows® 10, OS X 10.10, iOS, and Android
as examples.
Connect the mobile device to the Wi-Fi Direct network.
For Windows® 7:
1 Click the network icon on the taskbar.
2 Click the printer's SSID
Connect.
3 Enter the passphrase, and then click OK.
4 Click Cancel, and then exit the Set Network Location window.
For Windows® 10:
1 Click the Start button, and then click Settings.
2 Click the Wi-Fi icon.
3 Click the printer's SSID
Connect.
4 Enter the passphrase, and then click Next.
For OS X 10.10:
1 Click the network icon on the Menu Bar.
2 Click the printer's SSID.
3 Enter the passphrase, and then click Join.
For iOS:
1 Tap Settings
Wi-Fi.
2 Tap the printer's SSID.
62
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
3 Enter the passphrase, and then tap Join.
For Android:
The procedure varies depending on your mobile device you are using. Refer to the
manual supplied with your mobile device.
Printing via Wi-Fi Direct
Installing the Print Driver
Before printing, you are required to install the print driver accordingly.
For Windows® 7/Windows® 10:
You need to install the print driver on the mobile device. See "Installing the Software for
Windows® Computers."
For OS X 10.10:
You need to install the print driver on the mobile device. See "Installing the Software for
Macintosh Computers."
For iOS:
You need to install the printing program from App Store, and then the printer is ready for
use. For details, see "Dell Document Hub."
For Android:
You need to install the printing program from Google Play™, and then the printer is
ready for use. For details, see "Dell Document Hub."
The printing procedure varies depending on your mobile device you are using. Refer to
the manual supplied with your mobile device to print as you normally do from the
mobile device.
Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network
1 Press the
(Wi-Fi) button.
2 Tap Wi-Fi Direct
Paired Device.
NOTE:
• The Paired Device menu is displayed only when the printer is connected via Wi-Fi Direct.
3 Tap the mobile device name to disconnect, or select Disconnect All.
4 Tap Disconnect now or Disconnect and Reset Passphrase
You can also disconnect the mobile device from the following steps:
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab
Device.
Admin Settings
Network
Yes.
Wi-Fi Direct
Paired
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3 Tap Disconnect All.
4 Tap Disconnect now or Disconnect and Reset Passphrase
Yes.
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
63
Resetting the Passphrase
1 Press the
(Wi-Fi) button.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
2 Tap Wi-Fi Direct.
until Passphrase appears, and then tap Passphrase.
3 Tap
4 Tap Reset Passphrase
Yes.
The Wi-Fi Direct is disconnected and the passphrase is reset.
Resetting the PIN
1 Press the
(Wi-Fi) button.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
2 Tap Wi-Fi Direct.
until WPS Setup appears, and then tap WPS Setup.
3 Tap
4 Tap PIN Code Reset Code Yes.
The Wi-Fi Direct is disconnected and the PIN is reset.
Dell Document Hub
The Dell Document Hub app allows you to scan to and print from a variety of common
cloud storage services. Easy to use and navigate, this free app enables direct printing of
photos, documents, web content and more, to supported Dell printers on a Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi
Direct, or Ethernet network. You can also view the printer status and configuration of
print and scan settings. For details, click Learn more at www.dell.com/dochub.
Android
Download the Dell Document Hub app for free from Google Play.
Scan the QR Code® for quick access to the relevant application store.
iOS
Download the Dell Document Hub app for free from App Store.
Scan the QR Code for quick access to the relevant application store.
64
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
Tap To Print/Scan
Tap To Print allows you to add the printer to a mobile device such as a tablet or a
notebook computer, simply by tapping the mobile device onto the printer. Once the
printer is added to the mobile device, you can start printing or scanning from the mobile
device.
NOTE:
• To utilize the Tap To Print feature, make sure the followings:
- The mobile device should be NFC-enabled and running the Windows® 8.1 or Windows® 10
operating system.
- The printer should be connected to a network. If the printer is connected with the computer
only with the USB cable, the Tap To Print feature is not available.
• The Tap To Print feature is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Preparations
•
Make sure that the Tap To Print feature is enabled.
The Tap To Print feature is enabled as default on the printer.
To enable the Tap To Print feature from the operator panel, perform the following.
NOTE:
• You can set the same setting using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™
Printer Configuration Web Tool."
•
•
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings System Settings.
3 Tap
until NFC - Tap to Print appears, and then tap NFC - Tap to
Print.
4 Tap Enable OK.
5 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again to apply the settings.
Make sure that both the printer and the computer are on the same network.
It is recommended that the computer is connected to the Internet so that the latest
driver could be installed on the computer.
Adding the Printer to the Mobile Device
While the printer is connected to the same subnet of the network with the mobile
device, you can add the printer to the mobile device by tapping the mobile device onto
the printer. The printer is added as a Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer.
The following procedure uses Windows® 8.1/Windows® 10 as an example.
NOTE:
• Make sure that the NFC function is activated on the mobile device.
• This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
65
1 Locate the NFC reader of the mobile device.
2 Tap the mobile device onto the
For the location of
(NFC) reader of the printer.
(NFC) reader, see "Operator Panel."
The printer beeps when it detects the mobile device, and the following message
appears in the top right corner of the mobile device.
The following procedure uses Dell H825cdw as an example.
Add a device?
Tap to set up your Dell-H825cdw-xxxxxx.
3 Tap the message window to set up the printer on the mobile device.
The printer icon appears on the mobile device.
NOTE:
• The time required until the driver is installed depending on the network traffic.
• To check the printer icon, right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel
Hardware and Sound
Devices and Printers.
• If a printer icon already exists on the mobile device, the message appears in the top right
corner of the mobile device screen confirming whether to connect to the printer.
In this case, tap the message window to connect the mobile device to the printer.
Printing or Scanning
Once the printer is added and connected to the mobile device, you can start printing or
scanning. See "Sending a Job to Print" or "Scanning to a Computer With a Network
Connection."
AirPrint
AirPrint allows you to print through a network with the device running iOS or OS
X. Be sure to install the latest version of iOS for iOS device. For OS X, be sure to
update OS X and the apps you have purchased from the App Store using the
Software Update.
Setting Up AirPrint on Your Printer
1 Make sure that the printer is connected to the network.
2 Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
66
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
3 Click Print Server Settings
the Print Server Settings tab
AirPrint.
4 Select the Enable AirPrint check box.
5 Click Apply New Settings
Restart Printer.
Printing via AirPrint
The following procedure uses the iPhone running iOS 8.1 as an example.
1 Open your e-mail, photo, web page, or document that you want to print.
2 Tap the action icon
3 Tap Print.
4 Select the printer and set printer options.
5 Tap Print.
Google Cloud Print
By registering the printer to your GoogleTM account, Google Cloud Print service allows
you to print from various devices connected to the Internet. You can print documents,
photos or e-mails using the Google ChromeTM browser or applications such as Google
DriveTM on your mobile device. For details about Google Cloud Print, visit the Google web
site.
Preparing to Use the Printer With Google Cloud Print
To use Google Cloud Print, you need to prepare the following in advance:
• Connect the printer to a network that has access to the Internet.
NOTE:
• Google Cloud Print supports only IPv4 connection.
• If the printer is connected to a network via a proxy server, you need to specify the settings in
Proxy Server from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Proxy Server."
•
•
Acquire a Google account and a GmailTM address.
Enable Google Cloud Print on the operator panel.
NOTE:
• You can set the same setting using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™
Printer Configuration Web Tool."
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Network Protocols.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3 Tap
until Google Cloud Print appears, and then tap Google Cloud
Print.
4 Tap Enable OK.
5 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again to apply the settings.
Selecting the Version of the Google Cloud Print Service
Select the version of the Google Cloud Print service from either version 1.1 or version
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
67
2.0.
Google Cloud Print version 1.1 sends the print data to the printer via Internet. For this
version, the printer needs to be connected to the Internet.
Google Cloud Print version 2.0 sends the print data to the printer either via Internet or via
local network. This version is recommended for the environment where the Internet
connection cannot be used.
NOTE:
• Available options for printing may vary according to your device or the version of the Google
Cloud Print service.
• You cannot simultaneously use both version 1.1 and version 2.0 of the Google Cloud Print service
on a printer.
Registering the Printer to Your Google Account
For Google Cloud Print Version 1.1
1 Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2 Click Print Server Settings the Print Server Settings tab Google Cloud Print
Register This Device to Google Cloud Print.
A sheet with a URL for the Google Cloud Print printer registration web site is printed.
3 From the web browser of your computer, visit the Google web site and sign in with
your Google account.
You can visit the Google Cloud Print registration web site by entering the URL on the
printout into your web browser or by scanning the QR code with your mobile
device.
68
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
4 On the Google Cloud Print registration web site, click Finish printer registration.
5 Click Manage your printers.
The printer is listed in the Printers list and ready for use with the Google Cloud Print
service.
For Google Cloud Print Version 2.0
1 Open the Google Chrome browser. When you are using the Google Chromebook,
start and log in to the Chromebook.
2 Click
in the top right corner, and then select Settings.
3 Click Show advanced settings in the bottom of the page.
4 Click Google Cloud Print
Manage.
NOTE:
• If a message is displayed under New Devices to sign in to Chrome, click sign in and sign in to
Chrome.
5 Click Register for the printer you want to register.
NOTE:
• If Bonjour (mDNS) is disabled, the newly added printer is not displayed in New devices. In this
case, start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Click Print Server Settings
the Print
Server Settings tab
Port Settings. Select the Bonjour (mDNS) check box.
6 When the window to confirm the registration appears, click Register.
7 Follow the on-screen instruction on the printer.
8 When the printer name appears in the My devices list, the registration is completed.
NOTE:
• It may take about 5 minutes or more until the printer name appears in the My devices list.
Sharing the Printer With the Google Cloud Print Service
You can share the printer registered for the Google Cloud Print service with other users.
1 Open the Google Chrome browser.
When you are using the Google Chromebook, start and log in to the Chromebook.
2 Click
in the top right corner, and then select Settings.
3 Click Show advanced settings in the bottom of the page.
4 Click Google Cloud Print
Manage.
NOTE:
• If a message is displayed to sign in to Chrome, click sign in and sign in to Chrome.
5 Click Manage for the printer you want to share.
6 Click Google Cloud Print
Share.
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
69
7 In the window to specify the printer sharing, enter the Google accounts of the users
that you want to invite to share the printer, and click Share.
NOTE:
• When the invited users log in to the Google Cloud Print web page, a message appears to
show that the printer owner made the sharing settings. Accept the sharing invitation.
Canceling the Registration to Google Cloud Print
1 Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2 Click Print Server Settings
Cancel Registration.
3 Make sure that Register This Device to Google Cloud Print appears.
Printing via Google Cloud Print
The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you are using.
You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print service on the Google
web site.
Printing From an Application on a Mobile Device
The following procedure uses the Google Drive application on an Android mobile device
as an example.
1 Install the Google Drive application on your mobile device.
NOTE:
• You can download the application from Google Play.
2 Start the Google Drive application from your mobile device.
3 Tap
next to the file name of the file you want to print.
4 Tap Print.
If Print is not displayed, tap
, and then tap Print.
5 Select a google cloud printer form the list.
6 Specify printer options, and then tap
Printing From Google Chrome
NOTE:
• You are required to register the Google Cloud Print Version 2.0.
The following procedure uses the Google Chrome browser on a Windows® PC as an
example.
1 Open the Google Chrome browser.
2 Open the web page or e-mail that you want to print.
3 Click
or
(varies depending on the version of the Google Chrome browser) in
the top right corner, and then click Print.
4 In the Destination area, click Change.
5 In the Google Cloud Print area, select the printer.
70
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
6 Click Print.
Printing From Google Chromebook
NOTE:
• You are required to register the Google Cloud Print Version 2.0.
1 Open the web page or e-mail that you want to print.
2 Click
in the top right corner and then click Print.
3 Confirm that your printer is specified in the Destination area. If not, click Change
and select your printer.
4 Click Print.
Mopria Print Service
Mopria-certified mobile devices can connect and print to certify printer. Either connect
your mobile devices to the same network as the printer or make a direct connection with
Wi-Fi Direct.
Works with Mopria-certified smartphones and tablets or Android 4.4 devices with the
Mopria Print Service download from Google Play.
https://play.google.com/store/apps/
http://www.mopria.org/
NOTE:
• Your mobile device and printer need to be connected to the same network.
• Mopria Print Service may be preloaded into your smartphone or tablet. If your mobile device does
not have the Mopria Print Service, you can easily download it free of charge from Google Play.
• Make sure that Mopria is set to Enable in advance using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Mopria."
Setting Up Mopria Print Service on Your Printer
1 Make sure that the printer is connected to the network.
2 Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
3 Click Print Server Settings
the Print Server Settings tab
Mopria.
4 Click Enable.
The printer is ready for Mopria Print Service.
Printing via Mopria Print Service
1 Open your e-mail, photo, web page, or document that you want to print.
2 Tap the menu, and then select Print.
3 Tap All printers in the menu.
4 Select the printer, and then set printer options.
5 Tap Print.
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
71
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers
Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
This section provides information for installing or setting up the print driver with CUPS
on Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 6 Desktop, SUSE® Linux Enterprise Desktop 11, or Ubuntu
12.04 LTS.
The following procedure uses Dell H825cdw as an example.
Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop
Setup Overview
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop:
1 Install the print driver.
2 Set up the print queue.
3 Set up the default queue.
4 Specify the printing options.
Installing the Print Driver
1 Select Applications
System Tools
Terminal.
2 Enter the following command in the terminal window.
su
[administrator password]
rpm -ivh [file path]
/Dell-Color-MFP-S2825cdn-H825cdw-x.x-x.rpm
Setting Up the Print Queue
To perform printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1 Open the URL http://localhost:631 using a web browser.
2 Click Administration
Add Printer.
3 Enter root as the user name, enter the administrator password, and then click OK.
For network connections:
a Select LPD/LPR Host or Printer from the Other Network Printers menu, and
then click Continue.
b Enter the IP address of the printer in Connection, and then click Continue.
Format: lpd:// xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (the IP address of the printer)
For USB connections:
a Select Dell Color MFP H825cdw from the Local Printers menu, and then click
Continue.
72
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
4 Enter the name of the printer in the Name box in the Add Printer window, and then
click Continue.
You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further
information.
5 Select Dell Color MFP H825cdw vxxxx.PS (en) from the Model menu, and then click
Add Printer.
Printing From the Program
When you have finished setting up the queue, you can print from the programs. To print
from the program, specify the queue in the print dialog box.
However, on programs such as Mozilla, it may only be possible to print from the default
queue.
In these cases, set the queue that you want to print to as the default queue before you
start printing. See "Setting Up the Default Queue."
Setting Up the Default Queue
1 Select Applications
System Tools
Terminal.
2 Enter the following command in the terminal window.
su
[administrator password]
lpadmin -d [queue name]
Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as color mode.
1 Open the URL http://localhost:631 using a web browser.
2 Click Administration
Manage Printers.
3 Click the queue name for which you want to specify the printing options.
4 Select Set Default Options from the Administration menu.
5 Click the desired setting item to specify the required settings, and then click Set
Default Options.
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
73
Uninstalling the Print Driver
1 Select Applications
System Tools
Terminal.
2 Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.
su
[administrator password]
/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x [queue name]
3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.
4 Enter the following command in the terminal window.
su
[administrator password]
rpm -e Dell-Color-MFP-S2825cdn-H825cdw
Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11
Setup Overview
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11:
1 Install the print driver.
2 Set up the print queue.
3 Set up the default queue.
4 Specify the printing options.
Installing the Print Driver
1 Select Computer More Applications..., and then select GNOME Terminal on the
Application Browser.
2 Enter the following command in the terminal window.
su
[administrator password]
rpm -ivh [file path] /
Dell-Color-MFP-S2825cdn-H825cdw-x.x-x.rpm
74
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
Setting Up the Print Queue
To perform printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1 Select Computer More Applications..., and then select YaST on the Application
Browser.
2 Enter the administrator password, and then click Continue.
3 Select Hardware
Printer.
For network connections:
a Click Add.
b Click Connection Wizard.
c Select Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol from Access Network Printer or
Printserver Box via.
d Enter the IP address of the printer in IP Address or Host Name:.
e Select Dell in the Select the printer manufacturer: drop-down list box.
f Click OK.
g Select your printer from the Assign Driver list.
NOTE:
• You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.
h Check the settings, and then click OK.
For USB connections:
a Click Add.
b Select your printer from the Assign Driver list.
NOTE:
• You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.
c Check the settings, and then click OK.
Printing From the Program
When you have finished setting up the queue, you can print from the programs. To print
from the program, specify the queue in the print dialog box.
However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the
program such as Mozilla. In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to
print to as the default queue. See "Setting Up the Default Queue."
Setting Up the Default Queue
You can set the default queue when you add the printer.
1 Select Computer More Applications..., and then select YaST on the Application
Browser.
2 Enter the administrator password, and then click Continue.
3 Select Hardware
Printer.
4 Click Edit.
5 Check that the printer you want to set is selected in the Connection list.
6 Select the Default Printer check box.
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
75
7 Check the settings, and then click OK.
Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as color mode.
1 Open a web browser.
2 Enter http://localhost:631/admin in Location, and then press  on the
keyboard.
3 Click Manage Printers.
4 Click Set Printer Options of the printer for which you want to specify the printing
options.
5 Specify the required settings, and then click Set Printer Options.
6 Enter root as the user name, enter the administrator password, and then click OK.
NOTE:
• Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue. If
you have not set it, proceed to "Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer
Administrator."
7 Execute printing from the program.
Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator
You must set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations as
the printer administrator.
1 Select Computer More Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the
Application Browser.
2 Enter the following command in the terminal window.
su
[administrator password]
lppasswd -g sys -a root
3 Enter the password for authority as the printer administrator.
4 Re-enter the password.
Uninstalling the Print Driver
1 Select Computer More Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the
Application Browser.
2 Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.
su
[administrator password]
/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x [queue name]
76
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the printer.
4 Enter the following command in the terminal window.
su
[administrator password]
rpm -e Dell-Color-MFP-S2825cdn-H825cdw
Operation on Ubuntu 12.04 LTS
Setup Overview
1 Install the print driver.
2 Set up the print queue.
3 Set up the default queue.
4 Specify the printing options.
Installing the Print Driver
1 Click Dash Home, and then enter the terminal in the Search text box.
2 Click Applications
Terminal.
3 Enter the following command in the terminal window.
For the 32-bit architecture:
sudo lpadmin -d (Enter the queue name)
(Type the administrator password)
For the 64-bit architecture:
sudo dpkg –i (Type the file path)/
dell-color-mfp-s2825cdn-h825cdw-*.*-*_amd6
4.deb
(Type the administrator password)
Setting Up the Print Queue
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1 Open the URL http://localhost:631 using a web browser.
2 Click Administration
Add Printer.
3 Enter the user name and the administrator password, and then click OK.
4 Select either of the following according to the type of your printer connection.
For network connections:
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
77
a Select LPD/LPR Host or Printer from the Other Network Printers menu, and
then click Continue.
b Enter the IP address of the printer in Connection, and then click Continue.
Format: lpd://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (the IP address of the printer)
For USB connections:
a Select Dell Color MFP H825cdw from the Local Printers menu, and then click
Continue.
5 Select the Add Printer window, and then enter the name of the printer in the Name
box.
6 Click Continue.
You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further
information.
If you want to share the printer, select the Share This Printer check box.
7 Select Dell from the Make menu, and then click Continue.
8 Select Dell Color MFP H825cdw vxxxx.PS from the Model menu, and then click Add
Printer.
Printing From Applications
When you have finished setting up the print queue, you can print jobs from the
applications.
Start the print job from the application, and then specify the queue in the print dialog
box.
However, on programs such as Mozilla, it may only be possible to print from the default
queue.
In these cases, set the queue that you want to print to as the default queue before you
start printing.
For information on specifying the default queue, see "Setting Up the Default Queue."
Setting Up the Default Queue
1 Click Dash Home, and then enter terminal in the Search text box.
2 Click Terminal in the Applications category of the search results.
3 Enter the following command in the terminal window.
sudo lpadmin -d (Enter the queue name)
(Type the administrator password)
Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as 2-sided printing.
1 Open the URL http://localhost:631 using a web browser.
2 Click Administration
Manage Printers.
3 Click the queue name for which you want to specify the printing options.
78
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
4 Select Set Default Options from the Administration menu.
5 Click the desired setting item, and then specify the required settings.
6 Click Set Default Options.
Uninstalling the Print Driver
1 Click Dash Home, and then enter terminal in the Search text box.
2 Click Terminal in the Applications category of the search results.
3 Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.
sudo /usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Type the print queue name)
(Type the administrator password)
4 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.
5 Enter the following command in the terminal window.
sudo dpkg –r Dell-Color-MFP-S2825cdn-H825cdw
(Type the administrator password)
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
79
Setting the IP Address
Assigning an IP Address
You can select the IP mode from Dual Stack, IPv4, and IPv6. If your network supports
both IPv4 and IPv6, select Dual Stack.
Select the IP mode of your environment, and then set IP address, subnet mask (for IPv4
only), and gateway address.
NOTE:
• Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance issues.
• IP addresses should be assigned by advanced users or system administrators.
• When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 mode, use the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web
Tool. To display the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, use the link-local address. To check the
link-local address, print a system settings report and check the Link-Local Address under Network
(Wired) or Network (Wireless).
See "Report / List."
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
When Using the Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows® Only)
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer.
2 Click Main Menu.
3 Click Change.
80
Setting the IP Address
4 Click Configure the IP address settings
Next.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions until the Configure Printer screen appears.
6 Click Advanced.
7 Specify the IP address settings according to your network environment.
8 Click Next, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
When Using the Operator Panel
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab
Admin Settings
Network.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3 Perform either of the following:
If the printer is connected to a network with the Ethernet cable:
Tap Ethernet.
For Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw:
If the printer is connected to a wireless network:
Tap Wi-Fi.
4 Tap IP Mode
5 Tap
IPv4 Mode
OK.
until TCP / IP appears, and then tap TCP / IP
Get IP Address.
6 Select how the IP address is assigned.
• To set the IP address automatically, select AutoIP, DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, or
Panel, and then proceed to step 7.
• To set the IP address manually, select Panel, and then perform the following:
a Tap IP Address.
The cursor is located at the first octet of the IP address.
b Use the number pad to enter the first octet of the IP address, and then tap
The cursor moves to the next octet.
NOTE:
• You can only enter one octet at a time and must tap
after entering each octet.
Enter the rest of the octets, and then tap OK.
Tap Subnet Mask.
Use the number pad to enter the subnet mask, and then tap OK.
Tap Gateway Address.
Use the number pad to enter the gateway address, and then tap OK.
7 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
Verifying the IP Settings
You can check the settings by using the operator panel, or printing the system settings
report.
Setting the IP Address
81
Verifying the Settings Using Operator Panel
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap About This MFP
the Network tab.
3 Verify the IP address displayed in IP(v4) Address.
Verifying the Settings Using System Settings Report
1 Print the system settings report.
See "Report / List."
2 Verify that the correct IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address are listed in the
system settings report under Network (Wired) or Network (Wireless).
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0, an IP address has not been assigned. See
"Assigning an IP Address."
NOTE:
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
82
Setting the IP Address
3
Using Your Printer
Using the Operator Panel
84
Understanding the System Menus
90
Understanding the Job Menus
125
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
139
Print Media Guidelines
187
Loading Print Media
193
Loading Documents
204
83
Using the Operator Panel
The operator panel consists of a touch panel, a Ready/Error LED, control buttons, a
(Power) button, and a number pad. Use the touch panel and number pad to browse the
operator panel menus and enter texts and numbers.
For details about names of parts, see "Operator Panel."
NOTE:
• The screenshots used in this section are those of the Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw unless
otherwise mentioned.
About the Home Screen
This section describes the fields and buttons on the Home screen which is displayed by
pressing the
(Home) button while the user is logged in to the printer.
NOTE:
• To display the Home screen, register at the portal screen beforehand and log in to the printer, or log
in as a Guest without registration. See "User Authentication."
• Dell Document Hub is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw only.
• Wi-Fi Direct Connection Status Icon and Wireless LAN Connection Status Icon are displayed on
Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw only.
Dell H625cdw/Dell H825cdw
45
Home
Guest
Dell S2825cdn
Home
Dock Menu
Guest
(Recent) Button
Displays the tiles of the functions you recently used. Up to 8 tiles can
be stored.
(Copy) Button
Displays the tiles of the copy functions.
(Print )Button
Displays the tiles of the print functions.
(Scan) Button
Displays the tiles of the scan functions.
(Fax) Button
Displays the tile of the fax function.
(Tools) Button
Displays the Information screen.
84
Using the Operator Panel
2
Notification Bar
Displays the status of the printer when
(Handle) is dragged
down. To close the screen, drag
(Handle) up.
You can adjust the screen brightness, check the toner information,
monitor the jobs currently in progress, or check warnings in this area.
• To adjust the screen brightness, drag the slider in Screen
Brightness.
• To see the Toner Information, tap Supplies. The information
of the toner is displayed with one toner at a time. To see the
information of other toners, swipe the screen.
Lock Icon
Displays when some functions are limited to access by the
Functions Control settings. While the Lock icon is displayed on the
upper-right of the tile, you are required to enter the password to
enable the function. After the function is enabled, the Lock icon is
displayed on the left to the account name, and you can access the
password-locked functions without re-entering the password.
For details about Functions Control, see "Functions Control"
Wi-Fi Direct Connection
Status Icon
Displays the Wi-Fi Direct connection status. This icon is displayed
only when Wi-Fi Direct is enabled.
Wireless LAN Connection
Status Icon
Displays the intensity of wireless signal when the printer is
connected to a wireless network.
Time/Network Information
Displays the current time or the network information such as IPv4
address or host name.
Account Name
Displays the name of the user currently logged in to the printer.
Tiles
Displays the tiles of the functions you can select from.
When the tile color is pale and disabled, you cannot select the
function.
Basic Operations on the Touch Panel
You can operate the touch panel as with a smartphone or a tablet.
Selecting the Item on the Screen
Tap the item.
Guest
Scrolling the Screen or the Listed Items
Swipe the screen by dragging your finger on the screen.
Using the Operator Panel
85
Home
Guest
To scroll faster, flick the screen.
Home
Guest
NOTE:
• If you cannot swipe or flick on some screens, operate by tapping the tiles or buttons.
Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles
NOTE:
• This is available when you select the local authentication. See "User Authentication."
To Move the Tiles
Tap and hold the tile you want to move, and then drag it to the desired place.
The short orange bar appears between the tiles to show the nearest drop point when
you are dragging the tile.
You can move the tile between pages as well.
Home
Guest
Home
Guest
NOTE:
• You cannot move the tiles in the Recent group screen of the Dock menu.
To Add the Tiles
Swipe the screen to display the last page of the Home screen or group screen, and then
86
Using the Operator Panel
tap Add App.
When the Apps List screen appears, tap the tile you want to add to the Home screen.
To Delete the Tiles
Tap and hold the tile you want to delete.
When
appears, drag the tile to
Home
Guest
Tap OK to delete the tile.
NOTE:
• To delete all tiles in the Recent group screen of the Dock Menu, tap
screen, and then tap OK.
in the Recent group
Using the Keyboard Displayed on the Touch Panel
During operations, a keyboard for entering text sometimes appears. The following
describes how to enter text.
Back
Done
Back
Done
QWERTY
Back
AZERTY
Done
QWERTZ
You can enter the following characters:
Item
Description
Entering alphabets
To enter uppercase letters, tap
. To return to the lowercase letters,
tap
again. To lock to the uppercase letters, double-tap
Entering numbers and symbols
Tap
Entering a space
Tap
Deleting characters
Tap
to delete one character at a time.
To Change the Keyboard Layout
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab
Language Settings
Keyboard Layout.
3 Tap the desired keyboard layout, and then tap OK.
Using the Operator Panel
87
Changing the Language
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab
3 Tap
Language Settings
Panel Language.
until the desired language appears, and then tap the desired language.
4 Tap OK.
Panel Lock
The Panel Lock feature allows some system settings to be kept in a locked state with the
password so that unauthorized personnel cannot access to the menu to change the
settings.
NOTE:
• Disabling the operator panel menus does not prevent access to the Stored Print and Tray
Settings menus.
Enabling the Panel Lock
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab
Admin Settings.
until Secure Settings appears, and then tap Secure Settings.
3 Tap
4 Tap Panel Lock
Panel Lock Control
Enable
OK.
5 Enter the new password, and then tap OK.
6 Re-enter the password, and then tap OK.
CAUTION:
• Make sure not to forget the password. If you forget the password, the following procedure
allows you to reset the password. However, the settings for the Address Book and Phone
Book will be reset as well.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 While holding the
(Information) button, turn on the printer.
Changing the Panel Lock Password
NOTE:
• You can change the password only when Panel Lock is set to Enable.
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab
Admin Settings.
3 Enter the password.
4 Tap until Secure Settings appears, and then tap Secure Settings.
5 Tap Panel Lock
Change Password.
6 Enter the current password, and then tap OK.
7 Enter the new password, and then tap OK.
8 Re-enter the password, and then tap OK.
88
Using the Operator Panel
Disabling the Panel Lock
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab
Admin Settings.
3 Enter the password.
4 Tap
until Secure Settings appears, and then tap Secure Settings.
5 Tap Panel Lock
Panel Lock Control
Disable
OK.
6 Enter the current password, and then tap OK.
Setting the Power Saver Timer
The printer enters the power saver mode when the printer is not used for a certain
period of time. You can set the Power Saver Timer for the printer on the operator
panel.
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings System Settings General
Power Saver Timer.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3 Tap Sleep or Deep Sleep.
4 Tap – or +, or use the number pad to enter the desired value.
You can specify from 1 to 50 minutes for Sleep or 1 to 10 minutes for Deep Sleep.
5 Tap OK.
About the Concurrent Jobs Feature
This feature enables you to start a concurrent job while a fax job is running. This is done
by temporarily displaying the Home screen and switching to a different function that can
be run concurrently such as copy or scan.
1 While the printer is sending or receiving a fax, press the
(Home) button.
2 Tap
Copy.
Or
Tap
Scan.
3 Change the copy or scan settings.
For details about the settings, see "Copying" or "Scanning."
4 Tap OK.
Using the Operator Panel
89
Understanding the System Menus
The system menus are configured by Information, Supplies, and Tools tabs,
accessible by pressing the
(Information) button on the operator panel.
You can limit the access to the some menus by setting the password.
This prevents other users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change the
settings. See "Panel Lock."
Report / List
Use the Report / List menu to print various types of reports and lists.
To display the Report / List menu, press the
(Information) button, and then tap
the Information tab.
❚ Report / List >
System Settings
Prints a list of the current user default values, the installed options, the amount of
installed print memory, and the status of printer supplies.
❚ Report / List >
Panel Settings
Prints a detailed list of all the settings of the printer menus.
❚ Report / List >
PCL Fonts List
Prints a sample of the available Printer Control Language (PCL) fonts.
❚ Report / List >
PCL Macros List
Prints the information on the downloaded PCL macro.
❚ Report / List >
PS Fonts List
Prints a sample of the available PostScript (PS) fonts.
❚ Report / List >
PDF Fonts List
Prints a sample of the available PDF fonts.
❚ Report / List >
Job History
Prints a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been processed. This list
contains the last 20 jobs.
90
Understanding the System Menus
❚ Report / List >
Error History
Prints a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.
❚ Report / List >
Print Meter
Prints the reports for the total number of pages printed.
❚ Report / List >
Color Test Page
Prints a page for testing colors.
❚ Report / List >
Protocol Monitor
Prints a detailed list of monitored protocols.
❚ Report / List >
Speed Dial
Prints the list of all members stored as speed dial numbers.
❚ Report / List >
Address Book
Prints the list of all addresses stored as address book information.
❚ Report / List >
Server Address
Prints the list of all members stored as server address information.
❚ Report / List >
Fax Activity
Prints the report of faxes you recently received or sent.
❚ Report / List >
Fax Pending
Prints the list of status of pending faxes.
❚ Report / List >
Stored Documents
Prints a list of all files stored for Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print,
and Proof Print in the RAM disk.
NOTE:
• Stored Documents feature is available only when RAM Disk in General under System Settings
is enabled.
Understanding the System Menus
91
Printing a Report / List
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap Report / List.
3 Tap
until the desired report or list appears, and then select that report or list.
4 Tap Print.
Wi-Fi | WPS
NOTE:
• Wi-Fi Direct is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Use the Wi-Fi | WPS menu to confirm or specify wireless network settings or
connections.
To display the Wi-Fi | WPS menu, press the
(Information) button, and then tap
the Information tab.
❚ Wi-Fi | WPS >
Wi-Fi
Use the Wi-Fi menu to confirm or specify wireless network settings. For details, see
"Wi-Fi.”
❚ Wi-Fi | WPS >
Wi-Fi Direct
Use the Wi-Fi Direct menu to confirm or specify Wi-Fi Direct network settings. For
details, see "Wi-Fi Direct.”
❚ Wi-Fi | WPS >
WPS (Connect via PBC)
Use WPS (Connect via PBC) menu to start configurations of the Wi-Fi Direct network
with WPS-PBC. For details, see "WPS Setup.”
❚ Wi-Fi | WPS >
WPS (Connect via PIN)
Use WPS (Connect via PIN) menu to start configurations of the Wi-Fi Direct network
with WPS-PIN. For details, see "WPS Setup.”
Paired Device
NOTE:
• Wi-Fi Direct is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Use the Paired Device menu to confirm the device name in the Paired Device list,
if there is any device connected to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct.
You can disconnect the paired device. For details, see "Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct
Network.”
Admin Settings
Each feature of the printer is set to the factory default settings.
92
Understanding the System Menus
Use the Admin Settings menu to customize the settings in accordance with the
setting environment, or your preferences.
To display the Admin Settings menu, press the
(Information) button, and then
tap the Tools tab.
❚ Admin Settings >
Phone Book
Use the Phone Book menu to configure the speed dial and group dial settings.
❚ Admin Settings > Phone Book >
Individuals
Stores up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations.
❚ Admin Settings > Phone Book >
Groups
Creates a group of fax destinations and register it under a two-digit dial code. Up to six
group dial codes can be registered.
❚ Admin Settings >
PCL
Use the PCL menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the Printer
Control Language (PCL) emulation printer language.
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Paper Tray
Specifies the default paper tray.
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Paper Size
Specifies the default paper size.
NOTE:
• Selecting a custom size for the paper size prompts you to enter a custom length and width.
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Orientation
Specifies how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Portrait
Prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the paper.
Landscape
Prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the paper.
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
2 Sided Print
Specifies whether to print on one side or both sides of a sheet of print media. For a
two-sided printing, you can specify the printout to be bound by the long edge or short
edge.
Understanding the System Menus
93
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Font
Specifies the default font from the fonts registered in the printer.
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Symbol Set
Specifies a symbol set for a specified font.
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Font Size
Specifies the font size for scalable typographic fonts. Font size refers to the height of the
characters in the font. One point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch (approximately
0.35 mm).
NOTE:
• The Font Size menu is only displayed for typographic fonts.
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Font Pitch
Specifies the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts. Font pitch refers to the number
of fixed-space characters in a horizontal inch of type. For non-scalable mono spaced
fonts, the pitch is displayed, but cannot be changed.
NOTE:
• The Font Pitch menu is only displayed for fixed or mono spaced fonts.
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Form Line
Sets the number of lines in a page. The printer sets the amount of space between two
vertical lines based on the Form Line and Orientation menu items. You can select
the correct Form Line and Orientation before changing Form Line.
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Quantity
Sets the default print quantity. Set the number of copies required for a specific job from
the print driver. Values selected from the print driver always override values selected
from the operator panel.
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Image Enhance
Specifies whether to enable the Image Enhance feature, which makes the boundary line
between black and white smoother to decrease jagged edges and enhance the visual
appearance.
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Hex Dump
Specifies whether to enable the Hex Dump feature, which helps to isolate the source of a
print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in
hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not executed.
94
Understanding the System Menus
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Draft Mode
Specifies whether to enable the Draft Mode feature, which saves toner by printing in the
draft mode. The print quality is reduced when printing in the draft mode.
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Line Termination
Adds the line termination commands.
Off
The line termination command is not added.
CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF
Add-LF
The LF command is added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=LF, FF=FF
Add-CR
The CR command is added.
CR=CR, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
CR-XX
The CR and LF commands are added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Default Color
Specifies the color mode. This setting is used for a print job that does not specify a print
mode.
❚ Admin Settings > PCL >
Ignore Form Feed
Specifies whether to enable the Ignore Form Feed feature, which ignores blank pages
that only contain Form Feed control codes.
❚ Admin Settings >
PS
Use the PS (PostScript) menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the
PostScript Level3 Compatible emulation printer language.
❚ Admin Settings > PS >
PS Error Report
Specifies whether to enable the PS Error Report feature, which specifies the contents of
the errors concerning PostScript Level3 Compatible page description language are
printed.
The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
NOTE:
• Instructions from the PS driver override the settings specified on the operator panel.
❚ Admin Settings > PS >
PS Job Time-out
Specifies whether to enable the PS feature, which specifies the execution time for one
PostScript Level3 Compatible job. The change becomes effective after the printer is
turned off and then on again.
Understanding the System Menus
95
❚ Admin Settings > PS >
Paper Select Mode
Specifies the way to select the tray for PostScript Level3 Compatible mode. The change
becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Auto
The tray is selected as the same setting as in the PCL mode.
Select From Tray
The tray is selected in a method compatible with regular PostScript
Level3 Compatible printers.
❚ Admin Settings > PS >
Default Color
Specifies the color mode to Color or Black. This setting is used for a print job which
does not specify a print mode.
❚ Admin Settings >
PDF
Use the PDF menu to change printer settings that only affect the PDF jobs.
❚ Admin Settings > PDF >
Quantity
Specifies the number of copies to print.
❚ Admin Settings > PDF >
2 Sided Print
Specifies whether to print on one side or both sides of a sheet of print media. For a
two-sided printing, you can specify the printout to be bound by the long edge or short
edge.
❚ Admin Settings > PDF >
Print Mode
Specifies the print mode.
Normal
For documents with normal sized characters.
High Quality
For documents with small characters or thin lines, or documents
printed using a dot-matrix printer.
High Speed
Prints with the higher speed than the Normal mode, but the quality is
less.
❚ Admin Settings > PDF >
PDF Password
Specifies the password to print a PDF file secured with a password to open the PDF file.
❚ Admin Settings > PDF >
Collation
Specifies whether to sort the PDF job.
96
Understanding the System Menus
❚ Admin Settings > PDF >
Output Size
Specifies the output paper size for the PDF file.
❚ Admin Settings > PDF >
Layout
Specifies the output layout.
Auto %
Prints the document in the layout specified by the printer.
100% (No Zoom)
Prints in the same size as the document.
Booklet
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper bound by the edge.
2 Pages Up
Prints two pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
4 Pages Up
Prints four pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
❚ Admin Settings > PDF >
Default Color
Specifies the default output color.
❚ Admin Settings > PDF >
Detect Job Separator
Specifies whether to detect the end of the job in printing PDF files successively.
❚ Admin Settings >
Network
Use the Network menu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to the printer
through the wired or wireless network.
❚ Admin Settings > Network >
Wi-Fi
NOTE:
• When the Ethernet cable is disconnected, the Wi-Fi | WPS menu is available.
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Checks or specifies network settings.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi >
Wi-Fi
NOTE:
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Specifies whether to enable the Wi-Fi feature.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi >
Wi-Fi Status
NOTE:
• Wi-Fi Status setting is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Checks the wireless communication status.
Status
Good
Understanding the System Menus
97
Acceptable
Low
No Reception
SSID
Displays the name that identifies the wireless network.
Encryption Type
Displays the encryption type.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi>
Wi-Fi Setup Wizard
NOTE:
• Wi-Fi Setup Wizard is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Configures the wireless network interface.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Setup Wizard >
Select access point
Selects the access point from the list.
WEP Key
When you select an access point using WEP as the encryption type,
enter the WEP key.
PassPhrase
When you select an access point using WPA, WPA2, or Mixed as the
encryption type, enter the passphrase.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Setup Wizard >
Manual SSID Setup
Configures the wireless settings using the operator panel manually.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Setup Wizard > Manual SSID Setup >
SSID
Specifies a name to identify the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can
be entered.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Setup Wizard > Manual SSID Setup > SSID >
Infrastructure
Selects when you configure the wireless setting through the access point such as a
wireless.
No Security
Specifies No Security to configure the wireless setting without
specifying an encryption type from WEP and WPA-PSK-AES.
Mixed mode PSK
Selects to configure the wireless setting with the encryption type of
Mixed mode PSK. Mixed mode PSK automatically selects the
encryption type from either WPA-PSK-AES or WPA2-PSK-AES.
Passphrase
WPA2-PSK-AES
Selects to configure the wireless setting with the encryption type of
WPA2-PSK-AES.
Passphrase
WEP
Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63.
(hex: 0-9, a-f, A-F, 16 to 64 characters)
Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network. For 64bit
keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered. For 128bit
keys, up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
Transmit Key
98
Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63.
Specifies the transmit key from Auto and WEP Key 1 - 4.
Understanding the System Menus
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Setup Wizard > Manual SSID Setup > SSID >
Ad-hoc
Selects to configure the wireless setting without the access point such as a wireless
router.
No Security
Configures the wireless setting without specifying the encryption type
from WEP.
WEP
Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network. For 64bit
keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered. For 128bit
keys, up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
Transmit Key
Specifies the transmit key from WEP Key 1 - 4.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi >
WPS Setup
NOTE:
• WPS Setup is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
• WPS Setup is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Configures the wireless network using WPS.
Push Button Configuration
Configures the wireless setting with Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push
Button Configuration (WPS-PBC) .
PIN Code
Configures the wireless setting using the PIN code assigned by the
printer. You can also print the PIN code. Check it when entering PIN
assigned to the printer into your computer.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi >
IP Mode
Configures the IP mode.
Dual Stack
Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
IPv4 Mode
IPv6 Mode
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi >
TCP/IP
Configures TCP/IP settings.
Get IP Address
IP Address
AutoIP
Sets the IP address automatically. A random value in the range of
169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255 that is not currently in use on the
network is set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as 255.255.0.0.
BOOTP
Sets the IP address using BOOTP.
RARP
Sets the IP address using RARP.
DHCP
Sets the IP address using DHCP.
Panel
Use this option when you want to set the IP address manually on the
operator panel.
When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to the
printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value
in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a
gateway address.
Understanding the System Menus
99
Subnet Mask
When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is specified
using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.255.255.255.255
cannot be specified as the subnet mask.
Gateway
Address
When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address is
specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes
up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any
value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet
of a gateway address.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi >
IPsec
NOTE:
• IPsec is displayed only when IPsec is enabled on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Disables IPsec.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi >
Reset Wi-Fi
NOTE:
• Reset Wi-Fi setting is available only when the printer is connected to the wireless network.
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Initializes wireless network settings. After executing this setting and restarting the printer,
all wireless network settings are reset to their default values.
❚ Admin Settings > Network >
Wi-Fi Direct
NOTE:
• When the Ethernet cable is connected, or Wi-Fi is set to Off, Wi-Fi Direct is disabled.
• Wi-Fi Direct is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network settings.
Wi-Fi Direct
Group Role
Enables or disables the Wi-Fi Direct network.
Auto
Automatically resolves the group role for Wi-Fi
Direct.
Group Owner
Sets the printer as the Group Owner when using
Wi-Fi Direct. Setting the printer to become the
group owner makes it possible for mobile devices to
discover the printer. The SSID of the printer is
displayed in the list of wireless networks on your
mobile device.
Device Name
Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi-Fi
Direct network with up to 32 alphanumeric
characters. Check it when selecting the printer
name on your mobile device.
Paired Device
Displays the status of the Wi-Fi Direct connections
between the printer and up to 3 Wi-Fi mobile
devices.
Disconnect All
Disconnect
now
Disconnects all the Wi-Fi Direct connections right
now.
Disconnect and Disconnects the Wi-Fi Direct connections and
Reset
resets the passphrase.
Passphrase
100
Understanding the System Menus
SSID
Displays the name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct
network. You can also specify the name with up to
32 alphanumeric characters. "DIRECT-XX" cannot be
changed. Check it when selecting the Wi-Fi Direct
network name on your mobile device.
Passphrase
Displays the passphrase. Check it when entering the
passphrase into your mobile device.
Print
Passphrase
Prints the passphrase. Check it when entering the
passphrase into your mobile device.
Reset
Passphrase
Resets the passphrase.
WPS Setup
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using WPS.
Push Button
Configuration
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network with Wi-Fi
Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration
(WPS-PBC).
PIN Code
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using PIN code
assigned by the printer.
Print PIN Code
Prints the PIN code. Check it when entering PIN
assigned to the printer into your mobile device.
Reset Code
Resets the PIN code.
❚ Admin Settings > Network >
Ethernet
NOTE:
• When using a wired network, the Wi-Fi | WPS menu is not available.
Checks or specifies network settings.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Ethernet >
IP Mode
Configures the IP mode.
Dual Stack
Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
IPv4 Mode
IPv6 Mode
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Ethernet >
TCP/IP
Configures TCP/IP settings.
Get IP Address
AutoIP
Sets the IP address automatically. A random value in the range of
169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255 that is not currently in use on the
network is set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as 255.255.0.0.
BOOTP
Sets the IP address using BOOTP.
RARP
Sets the IP address using RARP.
DHCP
Sets the IP address using DHCP.
Panel
Use this option when you want to set the IP address manually on the
operator panel.
Understanding the System Menus
101
IP Address
When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to the
printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value
in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a
gateway address.
Subnet Mask
When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is specified
using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.255.255.255.255
cannot be specified as the subnet mask.
Gateway
Address
When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address is
specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes
up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any
value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet
of a gateway address.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Ethernet >
IPsec
NOTE:
• IPsec is displayed only when IPsec is enabled on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Disables IPsec.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Ethernet >
Connection Speed
NOTE:
• The Connection Speed setting is available only when the printer is connected to the wired
network.
Specifies the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet. The change
becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Auto
10BASE-T Half
10BASE-T Full
100BASE-TX Half
100BASE-TX Full
1000BASE-T Full
❚ Admin Settings > Network >
Protocols
Enables or disables each protocol. The change becomes effective after the printer is
turned off and then on again.
LPD
Port9100
FTP
IPP
SMB TCP/IP
WSD Print*1
WSD Scan
Network TWAIN
SNMP UDP*2
102
Understanding the System Menus
E-mail Alert
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Bonjour(mDNS)
Telnet
Update Address Book
HTTP-SSL/TLS
Google Cloud Print
Print from Dell Document Hub*3
Scan to Dell Document Hub*3
*1
*2
*3
Stands for Web Services on Devices
Stands for Simple Network Management Protocol
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
❚ Admin Settings > Network >
Advanced Settings
Specifies advanced network settings.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Advanced Settings >
IP Filter
NOTE:
• The IP Filter setting is available only for LPD or Port9100.
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Specifies whether to block data received through the wired or wireless network.
IPv4-Filter
Enables or disables IPv4 Filter.
IPv6-Filter
Enables or disables IPv6 Filter.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Advanced Settings >
IEEE 802.1x
NOTE:
• IEEE 802.1x is displayed only when the printer is connected using Ethernet cable and it is available
only when the IEEE 802.1x authentication is enabled.
Disables IEEE 802.1x authentication. The change becomes effective after the printer is
turned off and then on again.
❚ Admin Settings > Network > Advanced Settings >
PS Data Format
Specifies PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for a parallel interface,
you can configure the PS Data Format settings for the wired network. The change
becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Auto
Used when auto-detecting the PostScript Level3 Compatible
communication protocol.
Standard
Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.
BCP
Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.
TBCP
Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and
binary data to switch between them according to the specified
control code.
Binary
Used when no special processing is required for data.
Understanding the System Menus
103
❚ Admin Settings > Network >
Reset LAN
Initializes wired network data stored in non-volatile memory (NVM). After executing this
setting and restarting the printer, all wired network settings are reset to their default
values.
❚ Admin Settings > Network >
Delete All Certificates
Deletes all certificates of the printer. After executing this setting and restarting the
printer, all certificates are deleted.
❚ Admin Settings >
Fax Settings
Use the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings >
Fax Line Settings
Configures basic settings for the fax line.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Line Settings >
Fax Number
Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of a fax message.
NOTE:
• Make sure to specify Fax Number before using Junk Fax Setup.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Line Settings >
Country
Selects the country where the printer is used.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Line Settings >
Fax Header Name
Sets the sender name to be printed on the header on faxes.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Line Settings >
Line Type
Specifies the default line type to PSTN or PBX.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Line Settings >
Line Monitor
Specifies whether to enable the Line Monitor setting. Set the volume of the line monitor,
which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is
made.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Line Settings >
DRPD Pattern
Provides a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.
104
Understanding the System Menus
Pattern1–7
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) is a service provided by
some telephone companies. DRPD Patterns are specified by your
telephone company. The following shows the patterns provided with
the printer.
Pattern1
Pattern2
Pattern3
Pattern4
Pattern5
Pattern6
Pattern7
Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use
this service. For example, Pattern7 is the New Zealand FaxAbility
distinctive ringing pattern: rings for 400 ms, stops for 800 ms, rings
for 400 ms and stops for 1400 ms. This pattern is repeated over and
over again. This printer only responds to Distinctive Alert cadence(s)
DA4 in New Zealand.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings >
Incoming Defaults
Configures settings for incoming fax.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Receive Mode
Selects the default fax receiving mode.
Telephone
Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking
up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the
remote receive code, or by tapping Manual Receive in On Hook
and then tapping Receive.
Fax
Automatically receives faxes.
Telephone / Fax
When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone
rings for the time specified in Auto Receive Tel/Fax, and then the
printer starts receiving the fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the
printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a
telephone call.
Understanding the System Menus
105
Ans Machine/Fax
This mode is intended for use with an answering machine. When the
answering machine receives the call, the printer monitors the call for
fax tones. When the printer detects fax tones, the printer
automatically receives the fax. When the answering machine is off,
the printer goes into the Fax mode after the ring tone sounds for a
predefined time. If the phone communication in your country is serial,
this mode is not supported.
DRPD
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a
distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the
telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a
separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure
the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Ring Tone Volume
Specifies whether to enable the Ring Tone Volume setting. Set the volume of the ring
tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal
speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone / Fax.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Auto Receive Setup
Configures settings for automatic fax reception.
Auto Receive Fax
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after receiving an incoming call.
Auto Receive Tel/Fax
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after the external telephone receives an incoming call.
Auto Receive Ans/Fax
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Junk Fax Setup
Specifies whether to enable the Junk Fax Setup feature, which rejects unwanted faxes by
accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone Book.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Secure Receive
NOTE:
• The Secure Receive feature is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.
Specifies whether to require a password to print received faxes, and to set or change the
password.
Secure Receive Set
Change Password
Sets to require a password to print received faxes.
Sets or changes the four-digit password required to print received
faxes.
This item is available only when Secure Receive Set is set to Enable.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Received Fax Forward
Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Off
106
Understanding the System Menus
Forward
Forwards incoming faxes to a specified destination. Prints incoming
faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.
Forwarding
Number
Print and
Forward
Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes
are forwarded.
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified
destination.
Forwarding
Number
Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes
are forwarded.
Forward to
Email *1,2,3
Forwards incoming faxes to specified e-mail addresses. Prints
incoming faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.
Print and
Forward to
E-mail*2,3
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified e-mail
address.
Forward to
Server
Forwards incoming faxes to a specified server address. Prints
incoming faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.
Print and
Forward to
Server
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified server
address.
*1
*2
*3
Depending on the e-mail server settings, the printer may not get an error which occurs during the transfer.
This item is available only when the E-Mail Server information is registered. See "E-Mail Server."
This item is available only when Forwarding E-mail Address is registered. See "Fax Settings."
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
2 Sided Print
Specifies whether to enable the 2 Sided Print feature, which sets the duplex printing for
fax.
NOTE:
• Duplex print may not be done depending on the size of the received faxes or settings of the trays,
etc.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Remote Receive
Specifies whether to enable the Remote Receive feature, which receives a fax by
pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset
of the telephone. You can specify the tone in two digits to start Remote Receive.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Discard Size
Specifies whether to enable the Discard Size feature, which sets the printer to discard
images or any text at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit the
output paper. You can also set to automatically reduce a fax page to fit it onto the
appropriate paper size.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings >
Transmission Defaults
Configures settings for transmitting fax.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
Auto Redial Setup
Configures settings for automatic redial.
Understanding the System Menus
107
Redial Attempts
Sets the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax
number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer does not redial.
Interval of Redial
Sets the interval between redial attempts.
Resend Delay
Sets the interval between re-send attempts.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
Tone / Pulse
Selects the dialing type.
Tone
Uses tone dialing.
Pulse(10PPS)
Sets Dial Pulse, 10 Pulse Per Second as the dial type.
Pulse(20PPS)
Sets Dial Pulse, 20 Pulse Per Second as the dial type.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
Prefix Dial
Specifies whether to enable the Prefix Dial feature, which sets a prefix dial number. You
can set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial
number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange
(PABX).
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
Fax Cover Page
Specifies whether to enable the Fax Cover Page feature, which sets to attach a cover
page to faxes.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
Fax Header
Specifies whether to enable the Fax Header feature, which prints the sender information
on the header of the faxes.
NOTE:
• If United States is selected for the setting of Country, this option does not appear on the
menu. The setting is fixed to On and cannot be changed. See "Specifying the Fax Initial Settings
Using the Operator Panel.”
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
ECM
Specifies whether to enable the ECM (Error Correction Mode) feature. To use the ECM,
the remote machines must also support the ECM.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
Modem Speed
Adjusts the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
Display Manual Fax Recipients
Specifies whether to enable the Display Manual Fax Recipients feature, which displays
the fax number of the recipient on the Sending Fax screen when manually sending a
fax.
108
Understanding the System Menus
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings >
Fax Reports
Configures settings for fax reports.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Reports >
Fax Activity
Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and
outgoing fax communications.
Auto Print
No Auto Print
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Reports >
Fax Transmit
Sets whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission.
Print Always
Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error
Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable
Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Reports >
Fax Broadcast
Sets whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission to multiple
destinations.
Print Always
Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error
Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable
Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to
multiple destinations.
❚ Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Reports >
Fax Protocol
Sets whether to print the protocol monitor report, which helps you identify the cause of
a communication problem.
Print Always
Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error
Prints the protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable
Does not print the protocol monitor report.
❚ Admin Settings >
System Settings
Use System Settings to configure the power saving mode, warning tones, time-out
duration, display language, and job log auto print settings.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings >
General
Configures general settings for the printer.
Understanding the System Menus
109
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Power Saver Timer
Specifies the time for transition to power saver mode.
Sleep
Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter the Sleep mode after it
finishes a job.
Deep Sleep
Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter the Deep Sleep mode
after it has entered Sleep mode.
Power Off Timer
Specifies whether to enable the Power Off Timer and the time taken
by the printer to enter the Power Off Timer mode after it has entered
the Deep Sleep mode.
When you specify 1 minute for Sleep, the printer enters power saver mode 1 minute
after it finishes a job. This uses much less energy, but requires more warm-up time for
the printer. Specify 1 minute if the printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting
and you notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if the printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the
printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time.
Select a medium value if you want a balance between energy consumption and a shorter
warm-up period.
The printer returns to the standby mode from the power saver mode when it receives
data from the computer or remote fax machine. You can also change the status of the
printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Date & Time
Specifies the date and time formats.
Time Zone
Sets the time zone.
Date
Sets the date depending on the Format settings.
Format
Time
Sets the date format.
Sets the time.
Format
Sets the time format.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
mm / inch
Specifies the default measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the touch
panel.
NOTE:
• The default for mm / inch varies depending on other settings, such as Country and Document
Size.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Screen Brightness
Adjusts the screen brightness of the touch panel.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Audio Tone
Specifies whether to enable the Audio Tone feature, which emits a tone during operation
or when a warning message appears.
110
Understanding the System Menus
Control Panel
Selects the volume for a tone when the operator panel input is
correct.
Invalid Key
Selects the volume for a tone when the operator panel input is
incorrect.
Machine Ready
Selects the volume for a tone when the printer is ready to process a
job.
Copy Completed
Selects the volume for a tone when a copy job is complete.
Job Completed
Selects the volume for a tone when a job other than a copy job is
complete.
Fault Tone
Selects the volume for a tone when a job ends abnormally.
Alert Tone
Selects the volume for a tone when a problem occurs.
Out of Paper
Selects the volume for a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
Low Toner Alert
Selects the volume for a tone when a toner is low.
Auto Clear Alert
Selects the volume for a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs
auto clear.
NFC Authentication*
Selects the volume for a tone when an NFC card is placed on the NFC
reader for authentication.
All Tones
Selects the volume for all the alert tones.
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Low Toner Alert Message
Specifies whether to enable the Low Toner Alert Message feature, which shows the alert
message when the toner is low.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
OffHook Wake Up
Specifies whether to enable the OffHook Wake Up feature, which wakes up from the
Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Auto Log Print
Specifies whether to enable the Auto Log Print feature, which automatically prints a job
history report after every 20 jobs.
Print logs can also be printed using the Report / List menu.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
RAM Disk
Specifies whether to enable the RAM Disk feature, which allocates memory to the RAM
disk file system for the Secure Print, Private MailBox Print, Public Mail Box Print, and
Proof Print features. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and
then on again.
NOTE:
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again to apply the settings for the RAM Disk menu.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Fax Server Phone Book
Specifies whether to enable the Fax Server Phone Book feature, which searches the
Understanding the System Menus
111
phone numbers from the Phone Book for the LDAP server.
NOTE:
• You can search the phone numbers only from the local Phone Book when Fax Server Phone
Book is set to Off.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
E-mail Server Address Book
Specifies whether to enable the E-mail Server Address Book feature, which searches the
e-mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server.
NOTE:
• You can search the e-mail addresses only from the local Address Book when E-mail Server
Address Book is set to Off.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Power On Wizard
Performs initial setup for the printer.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Max E-mail Size
Specifies the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings >
Timers
Configures timer settings.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > Timers >
Auto Reset
Automatically resets the settings for Copy, Scan, Fax, E-mail, or Print to the default
settings and return to the standby mode after you do not specify any settings for the
specified time.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > Timers >
Fault Time-out
Specifies whether to enable the Fault Time-out feature, which specifies the amount of
time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally. The print job is
canceled if the time-out time is exceeded.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings >
Output Settings
Configures settings concerning output from the printer.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Default Paper Size
Specifies the default paper size.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Print ID
Specifies whether to enable the Print ID feature, which specifies a location where the
112
Understanding the System Menus
user ID is printed.
NOTE:
• When printing on DL size paper, a part of the user ID may not be printed correctly.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Print Text
Specifies whether to enable the Print Text feature. This feature outputs Page Description
Language (PDL) data, which is not supported by the printer, as text when the printer
receives it. Text data is printed on A4 or Letter size paper.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Banner Sheet
Specifies the position of banner sheet, and also specify the tray in which the banner
sheet is loaded.
Insert Position
Specify Tray
Off
Does not print the banner sheet.
Front
Inserted before the first page of every copy.
Back
Inserted after the last page of every copy.
Front & Back
Inserted before the first page of every copy and after the last page of
every copy.
The banner sheet is loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF)/tray1/optional 550-sheet feeder.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Substitute Tray
Specifies whether to use paper of a different size when the paper that is loaded in the
specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.
Off
No tray size substitute accepted.
Larger Size
Substitutes paper of next largest size. When there is no larger paper
size, the printer substitutes paper of nearest size.
Nearest Size
Substitutes paper of nearest size.
Use MPF
Substitutes paper from the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Letterhead 2 Sided
Specifies whether to enable the Letterhead 2 Sided feature, which prints on both sides
when using letterhead.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
A4<>Letter Switch
Specifies whether to enable the A4<>Letter Switch feature. This feature prints A4 size
jobs on Letter size paper if A4 size paper is not available or to print Letter size jobs on A4
size paper if Letter size paper is not available.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
A5<>Statement Switch
Specifies whether to enable the A5<>Statement Switch feature. This feature prints A5
size jobs on Statement size paper if A5 size paper is not available or to print Statement
size jobs on A5 size paper if Statement size paper is not available.
Understanding the System Menus
113
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Report 2 Sided Print
Specifies whether to print reports on one side or both sides of a sheet of print media.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Use Another Tray
Specifies whether to enable the Use Another Tray feature, which changes to another
paper tray when paper runs out in the specified paper tray.
NOTE:
• The size of image to print is not adjusted automatically. If you select another paper tray with paper
size smaller than the paper size specified in the job, the parts that are larger than the print media
are not printed.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Resume Printing After Jam Recovery
Specifies whether to enable the Resume Printing After Jam Recovery feature. This
feature deletes print job after recovering from paper jam.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings >
Set Available Time
Sets the available time for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.
Copy/Scan/Fax/ Set Available
Print
Time
Specifies whether to set the time when function is available.
Start Time
End Time
Recurrence
Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.
NOTE:
• Set Available Time can be configured when Print, Copy, Scan, or Fax is set to On.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings >
Secure Job Expiration
NOTE:
• Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Specifies the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Expiration Mode
Sets whether to enable or disable the Secure Job Expiration feature.
Expiration Time
Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Recurrence
Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the
RAM disk.
Weekly Setting
Sets the day of the week to delete the files stored as Secure Print in
the RAM disk.
Monthly Setting
Sets the day of the month to delete the files stored as Secure Print in
the RAM disk.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings >
ColorTrack Mode
Specifies whether to enable the ColorTrack Mode feature, which limits access to color
printing.
114
Understanding the System Menus
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings >
Non Registered User
Specifies whether to enable the Non Registered User feature, which permits the printing
of data without authentication information.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings >
Auto Color To Mono Print
NOTE:
• The Auto Color To Mono Print feature is available when Dell ColorTrack is disabled.
Specifies whether to enable the Auto Color To Mono Print feature, which prints all print
jobs in black and white even when color print is specified.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings >
ColorTrack Error Report
Specifies whether to enable the ColorTrack Error Report feature, which prints
error-related information if printing with ColorTrack results in an error.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings >
NFC - Tap to Print
Specifies whether to add the printer to a mobile device such as a tablet or a notebook
computer by tapping the device to the
(NFC) reader.
NOTE:
• This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
❚ Admin Settings > System Settings >
Calibration
Specifies tray to calibrate the machine regularly. This feature corrects consistency of
printing colors over time, environment and print media.
❚ Admin Settings >
Maintenance
Use the Maintenance menu to initialize the non-volatile (NV) memory, configure the
plain paper quality adjustment settings, and configure the security settings.
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Paper Density
Specifies paper density settings.
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Adjust Transfer Belt Unit
Adjusts the transfer bias when the faint image of the previous page, a part of the page
currently printing, etc. appear on the output.
K Offset
If faint black colored ghosts appear, try to decrease the value.
YMC Offset
If faint ghosts in color (yellow, magenta, or cyan) appear, try to
decrease the value.
Understanding the System Menus
115
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Adjust 2nd BTR
NOTE:
• The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Specifies the transfer roller voltage adjustment for each paper type. If you see mottles on
the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try
to decrease the voltage.
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Adjust Fusing Unit
NOTE:
• The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Adjusts the temperature setting of the fusing unit for each paper type. When the
printouts are curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the
paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Color Reg Adjust
Auto Correct
Automatically performs color registration correction.
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Clean Developer
Stirs the developer in the drum cartridge.
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Toner Refresh
Cleans the toner in the drum cartridge.
NOTE:
• The Toner Refresh feature uses the toner, and shorten the life of the toner cartridge and the drum
cartridge.
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Reset Defaults
Initializes the non-volatile (NV) memory. After executing this setting and restarting the
printer, all the menu parameters are reset to their default values.
User Fax Section
Initializes the fax number entries in the Address Book.
User Scan Section
Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.
User Account Section
Initializes the user registration information.
User App Section
Initializes the widget application information.
System Section
Initializes the system parameters.
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Initialize Print Meter
Initializes the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter
count is reset to zero.
116
Understanding the System Menus
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Clear Stored Jobs
NOTE:
• The Clear Stored Jobs feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Clears all files stored as Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail box Print, Proof
Print, and Stored Print in the RAM disk.
All
Deletes all files stored as Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public
Mail Box Print, and Proof Print in the RAM disk.
Secure Document
Deletes all files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Stored Document
Deletes all files stored as Stored Print in the RAM disk.
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Non-Dell Toner
Specifies whether to enable the Non-Dell Toner feature, which uses toner cartridge of
another manufacturer.
CAUTION:
• Using a non-Dell™ toner cartridge may severely damage the printer. The warranty does not
cover damages caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Adjust Altitude
Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric
pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the
printer is being used.
NOTE:
• An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of
remaining toner, etc.
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Decrease Ghosting
Reduces negative ghost.
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Clear Job History
Clears the job history of all finished jobs.
❚ Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Fax Line Test
NOTE:
• The Fax Line Test feature is not available when the Fax function is disabled.
Tests if the voltage supply from the fax line is sufficient.
❚ Admin Settings >
Secure Settings
Use the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the menus. This
Understanding the System Menus
117
prevents items from being changed accidentally.
❚ Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Panel Lock
Specifies whether to enable the Panel Lock feature, which sets a limited access to Admin
Settings with a password, and to set or change the password.
Panel Lock Control
Change Password
Sets password protection for Admin Settings.
Sets or changes the four-digit password required to access Admin
Settings.
This item is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.
❚ Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Functions Control
NOTE:
• The Functions Control setting is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.
Specifies whether to enable or disable each of the printer functions, or to restrict the use
of a function with a password. For Copy and USB Direct Print, you can restrict just
the color printing and color copying features with a password.
Copy
Enables or disables the Copy function.
You can also restrict the function with a password by setting to On
(Password) or On (Color Password).
Scan to E-mail
Enables or disables the Scan to E-mail feature.
You can also restrict the feature with a password using On
(Password).
Fax
Enables or disables the Fax function.
You can also restrict the function with a password using On
(Password).
Fax Driver
Enables or disables the Fax Driver function.
Scan to Network
Folder
Enables or disables the Scan to Network Folder feature.
Scan to
Computer
Enables or disables the Scan to Computer feature.
PC Scan
Enables or disables the PC Scan feature.
You can also restrict the feature with a password using On
(Password).
You can also restrict the feature with a password using
On(Password).
You can also restrict the feature with a password using On
(Password).
Scan to USB
Enables or disables the Scan to USB feature.
You can also restrict the feature with a password using On
(Password).
USB Direct Print
Enables or disables the USB Direct Print feature.
You can also restrict the feature with a password using On
(Password) or On (Color Password).
ID Copy
Enables or disables the ID Copy feature.
USB Service
118
Show When
Inserted
Enables or disables this setting to show the USB Drive Detected
screen when a USB memory is inserted in to the printer.
Understanding the System Menus
Automatic Doc
Detected Menu
Enables or disables this feature for the printer to detect document
loaded in the DADF and show DADF related menus on the touch
panel.
Change
Password*
Changes the four-digit password that is set under the Functions
Control menu.
This item is available only when On (Password) or On (Color Password) is enabled.
❚ Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Desktop Authentication
Specifies the Desktop Authentication method.
NOTE:
• Desktop Authentication is displayed on Dell S2825cdn only.
Local Authentication
Use the local authentication method.
Remote Authentication
Use the remote authentication method.
❚ Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Edit E-mail From Fields
Specifies whether to enable the Edit E-mail From Fields feature, which enables editing of
the transmission source when you use Scan to Email.
❚ Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Reconfirm Recipient
Specifies whether to reconfirm the recipient before sending a fax or scan.
NOTE:
• If the Reconfirm Recipient menu is set to Reconfirm Recipient, recipients can only be
selected from the phone book or the address book. You cannot directly enter an address or fax
number.
No Confirmation
Does not display a screen to reconfirm the recipient before the job is
actually sent.
Reconfirm Recipient
Displays a screen to reconfirm the recipient before the job is actually
sent.
❚ Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Domain Filtering
Specifies whether to enable the Domain Filtering feature, which sends e-mails to
specified domains.
NOTE:
• Set the domains from SMTP Domain Filtering on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
❚ Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Software Download
Specifies whether to enable the Software Download feature, which enables download of
firmware updates.
❚ Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Display of Network Information
Shows or hides network information in the message field of the Home screen.
Understanding the System Menus
119
Show IPv4 Address
Show Host Name
Hide Network Information
❚ Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Login Error
NOTE:
• Login Error feature is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.
Specifies whether to enable the Login Error feature, which specifies the number of error
entry attempts allowed when you log in as an administrator in Admin Settings and the
Report / List menu.
❚ Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
NFC Authentication
Specifies whether to enable the NFC Authentication setting, which enables the
authentication using the NFC authentication card.
NOTE:
• This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
❚ Admin Settings >
USB Settings
Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB port.
❚ Admin Settings > USB Settings >
USB Port
NOTE:
• USB Port setting is available only for the USB port on the rear of the printer.
Specifies whether to enable the USB Port setting, which enables the USB Port. The
change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
❚ Admin Settings > USB Settings >
PS Data Format
Specifies PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for a parallel interface.
You can configure the PS Data Format settings for the wired network. The change
becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Auto
Used when auto-detecting the PostScript Level3 Compatible
communication protocol.
Standard
Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.
BCP
Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.
TBCP
Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and
binary data to switch between them according to the specified
control code.
Binary
Used when no special processing is required for data.
120
Understanding the System Menus
❚ Admin Settings > USB Settings >
Job Time-out
Specifies whether to enable the Job Time-out feature, which specifies the amount of
time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer. The print job is canceled if
the time-out time is exceeded.
Default Settings
Use Default Settings menu to modify the Copy, Scan, or Fax menu defaults.
To display the Default Settings menu, press the
(Information) button, and then
tap the Tools tab.
❚ Default Settings >
Copy Defaults
Modifies the Copy menu defaults. Copy Defaults allows you to configure the
following items in addition to the items under the Copy menu. See "Copy."
❚ Default Settings > Copy Defaults >
Auto Exposure Level
Sets the default background suppression level to Normal/High/Highest.
❚ Default Settings > Copy Defaults >
Color Balance
Sets the color balance level of low/medium/high density for each color.
❚ Default Settings >
Fax Defaults
Modifies the Fax menu defaults. Fax Defaults allows you to configure the items
under the Fax menu. See "Fax.”
❚ Default Settings >
Scan Defaults
Modifies the Scan menu defaults. Scan Defaults allows you to configure the
following items in addition to the items under the Scan menu. See "Scan Settings."
❚ Default Settings > Scan Defaults >
Auto Exposure Level
Sets the default background suppression level.
❚ Default Settings > Scan Defaults >
TIFF File Format
Specifies the default TIFF file format to TIFF V6 or TTN2.
❚ Default Settings > Scan Defaults >
Image Compression
Sets the image compression level.
Understanding the System Menus
121
❚ Default Settings >
Direct Print Defaults/USB Direct Print Defaults
Modifies the defaults for the Direct Print Defaults/USB Direct Print
Defaults menu. See "Print PDF/TIFF.”
NOTE:
• For Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw, Direct Print Defaults is displayed. For Dell S2825cdn,
USB Direct Print Defaults is displayed.
Tray Management
Use the Tray Management menu to define the print media loaded in tray1 and the
optional 550-sheet feeder.
To display the Tray Management menu, press the
(Information) button, and then
tap the Tools tab.
❚ Tray Management >
Tray Settings
Configures tray settings.
❚ Tray Management > Tray Settings >
MPF
Specifies the paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
Display Tray
Prompt
MPF Mode
Select the checkbox to display a popup message that prompts to set
paper type and paper size when paper is loaded in the MPF. The
factory default is on (selected).
Use Panel
Settings
Uses the paper size and type specified on the operator panel.
Use Printer
Driver Settings
Uses the paper size and type specified on the print driver.
Manual
When the print job is started, the printer pauses the job and shows the
screen to prompt the user to load the paper of the specified size and
type. To continue the job, check that the specified paper is loaded,
and then tap Continue in the screen on the touch panel.
Size
Specifies the paper size.
Type
Specifies the paper type.
❚ Tray Management > Tray Settings >
Tray1
Specifies the paper loaded in tray1.
Display Tray Prompt
Select the checkbox to display a popup message that prompts to set
Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in tray1. The factory
default is on (selected).
Size
Specifies the paper size.
Type
Specifies the paper type.
NOTE:
• For details about supported paper sizes, see "Supported Print Media.”
122
Understanding the System Menus
❚ Tray Management > Tray Settings >
Tray2
NOTE:
• The Tray2 setting is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
Specifies the paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Display Tray Prompt
Select the checkbox to display a popup message that prompts to set
Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the optional
550-sheet feeder. The factory default is on (selected).
Size
Sets whether to specify the paper size automatically or manually.
Type
Specifies the paper type.
❚ Tray Management >
Tray Priority
Sets the priority order of the paper trays for automatic tray selection. If paper trays
loaded with the same paper size and type exists, the paper tray is selected according to
this priority order.
Language Settings
Use the Language Settings menu to configure Panel Language, or Keyboard
Layout.
To display the Language Settings menu, press the
(Information) button, and
then tap the Tools tab.
❚ Language Settings >
Panel Language
Determines the language of the text on the touch panel.
❚ Language Settings >
Keyboard Layout
Selects the keyboard layout on the touch panel.
Resetting Defaults
After executing this setting and restarting the printer, the phone book, address book, or
menu parameters are reset to their default values.
The following menu parameters are exceptions and are not reset.
• Network settings
• Panel Lock settings and password
• Functions Control settings for Copy, Scan to E-mail, Fax, Scan to Network
Folder, Scan to Computer, PC Scan, Scan to USB, USB Direct Print and
saved passwords
• Secure Receive settings and saved password
• Login Error settings
• Set Available Time settings
• Secure Job Expiration settings
• USB Port settings
Understanding the System Menus
123
• ColorTrack Mode settings
• ColorTrack Error Report settings
• Non Registered User settings
• NFC Authentication settings
• Tap to Print settings
To reset the settings, perform the following procedure:
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Maintenance.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3 Tap
until Reset Defaults appears, and then tap Reset Defaults.
4 Tap the desired setting, and then tap Initialize.
User Fax Section
Resets the phone book data.
User Scan Section
Resets the address book data.
User Account Section
Resets the user registration information.
User App Section
Resets the widget application information.
System Section
Resets the system parameters.
5 Tap Yes, Reset.
The printer restarts.
124
Understanding the System Menus
Understanding the Job Menus
Print
Use the Print menus to configure various settings for the Secure Print, Private Mail Box
Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print features.
To display the Print job menu, press the
(Home) button, tap
, and then select
the Print tile.
❚ Print >
Secure Print
NOTE:
• Secure Print feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Specifies whether and how to print the job stored as the Secure Print.
Select User ID
Enters the password you specified on the print driver.
Select a Job
Selects a job to print.
Select All
Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
Print and Delete Prints the selected job, and then deletes the document from print
memory.
Delete
Deletes the specified document from print memory.
❚ Print >
Private Mailbox
NOTE:
• Private Mailbox feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Specifies whether and how to print the job stored as the Private Mailbox.
Select User ID
Enters the password you specified on the print
driver.
Select a Job
Selects a job to print.
Select All
Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
Quantity
Specifies the quantity of printout.
Use Driver
Settings
Print
Sets the quantity of prints specified on the print
driver.
Prints the selected job.
Print and Delete Deletes the document after it is printed.
Delete
Deletes the specified document from print memory.
❚ Print >
Public Mailbox
NOTE:
• Public Mailbox feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Specifies whether and how to print the job stored as the Public Mailbox.
Select User ID
Enters the password you specified on the print
driver.
Select a Job
Selects a job to print.
Understanding the Job Menus
125
Select All
Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
Quantity
Specifies the quantity of printout.
Use Driver
Settings
Print
Sets the quantity of prints specified on the print
driver.
Prints the selected job.
Print and Delete Deletes the document after it is printed.
Delete
Deletes the specified document from print memory.
❚ Print >
Proof Print
NOTE:
• Proof Print feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Specifies whether and how to print the job stored as the Proof Print.
Select User ID
Enters the password you specified on the print
driver.
Select a Job
Selects a job to print.
Select All
Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
Quantity
Specifies the quantity of printout.
Use Driver
Settings
Print
Sets the quantity of prints specified on the print
driver.
Prints the selected job.
Print and Delete Deletes the document after it is printed.
Delete
Deletes the specified document from print memory.
❚ Print >
Secure Fax Receive
Prints confidential faxes. The printer can hold the job in memory until you arrive at the
printer and type the password on the operator panel.
❚ Print >
Tile Settings
Use the tile settings to create and edit custom tile for the Print menus.
Copy
Use the Copy menus to configure various settings for the copy function.
To display the Copy job menu, press the
(Home) button, tap , and then select the
Copy tile.
❚ Copy >
Quantity
Specifies the number of copies from 1 to 99.
❚ Copy >
Darken/Lighten
Makes the copy darker or lighter.
126
Understanding the Job Menus
❚ Copy >
Output Color
Selects color or black and white copying.
❚ Copy >
Select Tray
Specifies the input tray.
The paper is fed from the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF). When Use
Printer Driver Settings is set in MPF Configuration of Tray
Settings, Any is displayed for Size and Type. If you start the copy
job with Any as the paper size and type, A4 or Letter is selected as
the paper size and plain is selected as the paper type. If you want to
specify the size and type of paper in the MPF, select MPF and specify
the paper size and type.
MPF
Paper Size
Specifies the paper size.
Paper Type
Specifies the paper type.
Tray1
Tray2*
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
❚ Copy >
2 Sided Copying
Specifies whether to make duplex copy and select the binding position.
1 Sided
Copies one-sided documents into one-sided printouts.
2 Sided
Copies one-sided documents into two-sided printouts. You can
specify whether the printout is bound by the long edge or short edge.
1 Sided
Copies two-sided documents into one-sided printouts. Before
starting the copy, you need to specify whether the document is
bound by the long edge or short edge.
2 Sided
Copies two-sided documents into two-sided printouts. Before
starting the copy, you need to specify whether the document is
bound by the long edge or short edge.
❚ Copy >
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer.
❚ Copy >
Reduce/Enlarge
Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image. You can also enter a custom ratio.
❚ Copy >
Original Size
Specifies the default document size.
NOTE:
• When Auto is selected, the printer assumes that the document size is the size of the print media
loaded in tray1 or the MPF.
Understanding the Job Menus
127
❚ Copy >
Original Type
Improves the image quality by selecting the type of the document.
❚ Copy >
Collation
Specifies whether to sort the copy job. For example, if you make two copies of
three-page document, one complete set of three-page document is printed one by one.
You can also automatically sort a copy job only when you use the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF).
❚ Copy >
2-Up
Prints every two pages of documents to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Off
Auto
Automatically reduces to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Manual
Specify the reduce/enlarge ratio in Reduce/Enlarge.
❚ Copy >
Color Saturation
Adjusts the amount of colors to make the colors darker or lighter.
❚ Copy >
Margin
Specifies the top, bottom, right, left, and middle margins of the copy.
❚ Copy >
Auto Exposure
Specifies whether to enable the Auto Exposure feature, which suppresses the
background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
❚ Copy >
Save Settings
Use the save settings to save a variety of copy features. And also use to create and edit
custom tiles for copying.
ID Copy
Use the ID Copy menus to configure various settings for ID Copy features.
To display the ID Copy job menu, press the
(Home) button, tap , and then select
the ID Copy tile.
128
Understanding the Job Menus
Quantity
See "Copy."
Darken/Lighten
Output Color
Select Tray
Sharpness
Color Saturation
Auto Exposure
Reduce/Enlarge
❚ ID Copy >
Save Settings
Use the save settings to save various settings for ID Copy features. And also use to create
and edit custom tiles for ID Copy.
Scan to Email
Use the Scan to Email menus to use the e-mail to send the scanned data. See "Scan
Settings."
To display the Scan to Email job menu, press the
(Home) button, tap
, and
then select the Scan to Email tile.
Enter
Recipient's
Address
Address Book
Sender
Enters the e-mail address of the recipient using the keyboard.
Individuals
Selects an e-mail address from the local address book.
Groups
Selects an e-mail group from the local address book.
Network
Address Book
Searches an e-mail address from the server address book.
Keyboard
Enters the e-mail address of the sender using the keyboard.
Address Book
Selects an e-mail address of the sender from the local address book.
Network
Address Book
Searches an e-mail address of the sender from the server address
book.
Scan to Network Folder
Use the Scan to Network Folder menus to store the scanned data on a network
server or a computer. See "Scan Settings."
To display the Scan to Network job menu, press the
(Home) button, tap
, and
then select the Scan to Network tile.
Address Book
Selects an FTP address or Server Message Block (SMB) protocol
address from the local address book.
Scan to USB
Use the Scan to USB menus to save the scanned data to a USB flash drive attached to
the printer. See "Scan Settings."
To display the Scan to USB job menu, press the
(Home) button, tap
, and then
select the Scan to USB tile.
Folder Name
Selects which folder the scanned data is saved to.
Understanding the Job Menus
129
Scan to Computer
Use the Scan to Computer to save scanned data on a computer.
To display the Scan to Computer job menu, press the
(Home) button, tap
and then select the Scan to Computer tile.
NOTE:
• This feature is available when the operating system of the client computer is Windows Vista® SP2 or
later, Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1, or Windows® 10.
Computer (via
USB)
Saves scanned data on a computer connected via USB cable.
Computer Name
Selects which computer the scanned data is saved to. Up to 20
computers can be listed.
Scan
Scan for Print
Scan for Email
Sends the scanned data to the computer according to the chosen
event. The program associated with depends on the setting on the
computer.
Scan for Fax
Scan for OCR
❚ Scan to Computer >
Tile Settings
Use the tile settings to create and edit custom tiles for Scan to Computer.
❚ Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer >
Scan Settings
NOTE:
• The scan settings are common for Scan to Email, Scan to Network Folder, Scan to USB, and Scan
to Computer features.
❚ Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Output Color
Selects color or black and white scanning.
Color
Black & White
Works well for documents with texts.
Gray Scale
Works well for documents with texts and photos.
❚ Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Resolution
Specifies the resolution of the scanned data.
❚ Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
File Format
Specifies the file format to save the scanned data.
❚ Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
2 Sided Scanning
Specifies whether to scan one side or both sides of a document. For a two-sided
document, specify whether the document is bound by the long edge or short edge.
130
Understanding the Job Menus
❚ Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Darken/Lighten
Adjusts the density to make the scanned data darker or lighter.
❚ Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Contrast
Adjusts the contrast of scanned data. Higher contrast makes the colors darker and lower
contrast makes the colors lighter than the original.
❚ Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness to make the scanned data sharper or softer.
❚ Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Auto Exposure
Specifies whether to enable the Auto Exposure feature, which suppresses the
background of the original to enhance text on the scanned data.
❚ Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Original Size
Specifies the default paper size.
❚ Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Margin
Specifies the top, bottom, right, left, and middle margins of the scanned data.
❚ Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Create Folder
NOTE:
• Create Folder feature is available only for Scan to USB or Scan to Network Folder.
Specifies whether to enable the Create Folder feature, which creates a folder when
saving scanned data.
❚ Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
File Naming Mode
Specifies the detailed setting of File Naming Mode.
Auto
Sets the default file name.
Add Prefix
Adds texts in front of the file name.
Prefix/Suffix
String
Add Suffix
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is selected.
Adds texts after the file name.
Prefix/Suffix
String
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is selected.
Understanding the Job Menus
131
❚ Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer >
Save Settings
Use the save settings to save various settings for the scan function when using Scan to
Email, Scan to USB, Scan to Network Folder, or Scan to Computer. And also use to
create and edit custom tiles for scanning.
Fax
Use the Fax menus to configure various settings for the fax function.
To display the Fax job menu, press the
(Home) button, tap
, and then select the
Fax tile.
NOTE:
• The Fax function cannot be used unless you set up a country code under Country. If Country is
not set up, a message Set the Country Code appears on the touch panel.
Enter Number
Enters the fax number using the keyboard.
Speed Dial
Enters the speed dial number stored in the printer.
Phone Book
Individuals
Selects a fax number from the local address book.
Groups
Selects a group dial number from the local address book.
Network Phone Searches a fax number from the server address book.
Book
On Hook
Send
Sends faxes manually.
Receive
Receives faxes manually.
Polling
Manually retrieves information from a remote machine.
❚ Fax >
Fax Settings
Use the fax settings to configure various settings for the fax function.
❚ Fax > Fax Settings >
Darken/Lighten
Adjusts the density to make the fax darker or lighter.
❚ Fax > Fax Settings >
2 Sided Scanning
Specifies whether to scan one side or both sides of a document. For a two-sided
document, specify whether the document is bound by the long edge or short edge.
❚ Fax > Fax Settings >
Polling Receive
Specifies whether to enable the Polling Receive feature, which retrieves faxes from the
remote fax machine when you want to receive it.
❚ Fax > Fax Settings >
Resolution
Specifies the scan resolution to improve the output quality.
Standard
132
Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.
Understanding the Job Menus
Fine
Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or
documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine
Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The Super
Fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the
Super Fine mode. See the following note.
Photo
Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
NOTE:
• Data scanned in the Super Fine mode is transmitted at the highest resolution supported by the
remote machine.
❚ Fax > Fax Settings >
Fax Cover Page
Specifies whether to enable the Fax Cover Page feature, which attaches a cover page to
faxes.
❚ Fax > Fax Settings >
Delayed Send
Specifies whether to enable the Delayed Send feature, which sends a fax at a later time.
NOTE:
• A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored.
❚ Fax > Fax Settings >
Save Settings
Use the save settings to save various settings for the fax function. And also use to create
and edit custom tiles for faxing.
NOTE:
• Up to 30 addresses can be stored on the printer.
Print PDF/TIFF
NOTE:
• Print PDF/TIFF feature is available only when a USB flash drive is inserted in the front USB port.
Use the Print PDF/TIFF menus to specify the document stored in the root, file, or
folder in a USB flash drive. See "Print Settings."
To display the Print PDF/TIFF job menu, press the
(Home) button, tap , and
then select the Print PDF/TIFF tile.
Print JPEG
NOTE:
• Print JPEG feature is available only when a USB flash drive is inserted in the front USB port.
Use the Print JPEG menus to specify the photos stored in the root, file, or folder in a
USB flash drive. See "Print Settings."
To display the Print JPEG job menu, press the
(Home) button, tap , and then
select the Print JPEG tile.
Understanding the Job Menus
133
❚ Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG >
Print Settings
Use the print settings to configure various settings for the print function when using
Print PDF/TIFF, Print JPEG.
❚ Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG > Print Settings >
Quantity
Specifies the number of copies from 1 to 99.
❚ Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG > Print Settings >
Output Color
Selects color or black and white printing.
❚ Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG > Print Settings >
Select Tray
Specifies the input tray.
The paper is fed from the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF). When Use
Printer Driver Settings is set in MPF Configuration of Tray
Settings, Any is displayed for Size and Type. If you start the print
job with Any as the paper size and type, A4 or Letter is selected as
the paper size and plain is selected as the paper type. If you want to
specify the size and type of paper in the MPF, select MPF and specify
the paper size and type.
MPF
Size
Specifies the paper size.
Tray1
Tray2*
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
❚ Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG > Print Settings >
2 Sided Printing
Specifies whether to print on one side or both sides of a sheet of print media. For a
two-sided printing, you can specify the printout to be bound by the long edge or short
edge.
❚ Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG > Print Settings >
Layout
Specifies the output layout. Select whether to print one, two, or four pages on one side
of a sheet of print media. If you select Off(No Scaling), the parts that do not fit are
not printed (print size is not adjusted automatically).
❚ Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG > Print Settings >
Image Types
Sets the print image quality.
Auto
Prints PDF/TIFF files in the Text mode and JPEG files in the Photos
(Standard Quality) mode.
Photos (Standard Quality)
Prints the photographic images at the standard quality.
Photos (High Quality)
Prints the photographic images at the high quality.
134
Understanding the Job Menus
Text
Prints the text document at the standard quality.
❚ Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG > Print Settings >
Collation
Specifies whether to sort the job.
❚ Print PDF/TIFF > Print Settings >
PDF Password
Enters the password when you print a PDF file secured with password to open the PDF
file.
❚ Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG >
Save Settings
Use the save settings to save a variety of USB Direct Print features. And also use to create
and edit custom tiles for USB Direct Print.
Dell Document Hub
Use the Dell Document Hub menus to configure various settings for Dell Document
Hub.
To display the Dell Document Hub job menu, press the
(Home) button, and then
tap the Dell Document Hub tile.
NOTE:
• Dell Document Hub is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
❚ Dell Document Hub >
Search for Files
Searches the files saved in the cloud services, and print them from the printer.
Text Box
Enters the keywords, such as the words including the file name.
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.
Sets the settings of the Print Settings.
Displays the selected files. The first three pages of each file are
displayed in the small previews.
❚ Dell Document Hub >
Browse for Files
Browses and prints the files saved in the selected cloud services.
Text Box
Enters the keywords, such as the words including the file name.
Searches for the files in the current location or the selected cloud
services.
Sets the settings of the Print Settings.
Displays the selected files. The first three pages of each file are
displayed in the small previews.
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.
Saves the settings of the Print Settings as Favorite.
Understanding the Job Menus
135
❚ Dell Document Hub >
Scan
Scans the document and saves the scanned data in the cloud service.
File Name
Enters the file name you want to use.
File Format
Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned data.
Tag
Enters the tag you want to use.
Searches for the location to save the scanned data. You can search
for the location across the cloud services.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.
❚ Dell Document Hub > Scan >
PDF Password
Enters the password when you print a PDF file secured with password to open the PDF
file.
❚ Dell Document Hub > Scan >
File Name Option
Specifies the way to name the scanned data.
Off
Add Prefix
Adds texts in front of the file name.
Prefix/Suffix
String
Add Suffix
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is selected.
Adds texts after the file name.
Prefix/Suffix
String
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is selected.
For details about other settings, see "Scan Settings."
❚ Dell Document Hub >
Smart OCR Scan
Scans the document using Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and saves it in the cloud
service.
File Name
Enters the file name you want to use.
File Format
Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned data.
Tag
Enters the tag you want to use.
Searches for the location to save the scanned data. You can search
for the location across the cloud services.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.
❚ Dell Document Hub > Smart OCR Scan >
File Format
Specifies the file format to save the scanned data.
136
Understanding the Job Menus
❚ Dell Document Hub > Smart OCR Scan >
OCR Language
Specifies the language for the OCR.
❚ Dell Document Hub > Smart OCR Scan >
PDF Password
Enters the password when you print a PDF file secured with password to open the PDF
file.
❚ Dell Document Hub > Smart OCR Scan >
Blank Page Removable
Specifies whether to enable the Blank Page Removable feature, which removes the blank
pages.
❚ Dell Document Hub > Smart OCR Scan >
Image Enhancement
Sets whether to enable the Image Enhancement feature.
❚ Dell Document Hub > Smart OCR Scan >
File Name Option
Specifies the way to name the scanned data.
Off
Add Prefix
Adds texts in front of the file name.
Prefix/Suffix
String
Add Suffix
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is selected.
Adds texts after the file name.
Prefix/Suffix
String
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is selected.
For details about other settings, see "Scan Settings."
❚ Dell Document Hub >
E-mail Me
Scans the document and send to you as an attached file of an e-mail.
File Format
Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned data.
Subject
Enters the subject you want to use.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.
❚ Dell Document Hub > E-mail Me >
File Format
Specifies the file format to save the scanned data.
❚ Dell Document Hub > E-mail Me >
OCR Language
Specifies the language for the OCR.
Understanding the Job Menus
137
❚ Dell Document Hub > E-mail Me >
PDF Password
Enters the password when you print a PDF file secured with password to open the PDF
file.
❚ Dell Document Hub > E-mail Me >
Black Page Removable
Specifies whether to enable the Black Page Removable feature, which removes the
blank pages. For details about other settings, see "Scan Settings."
❚ Dell Document Hub >
Business Card Reader
Scans the business card and send vCard format data to you as an attached file of an
e-mail.
Subject
Enters the subject you want to use.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.
❚ Dell Document Hub > Business Card Reader >
File Format
Specifies the file format to save the scanned data.
❚ Dell Document Hub > Business Card Reader >
OCR Language
Specifies the language for the OCR.
Add App
Use the Add App menus to add a variety of tiles on the Home screen.
138
Understanding the Job Menus
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network
printer without leaving your desk. You can view and/or change the printer settings,
monitor toner level, and acknowledge the timing of ordering replacement consumables.
If you are a network administrator, you can copy the printer settings to one or all printers
on the network using your web browser.
NOTE:
• This web tool is available only when the printer is connected to a network.
Preparing to Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool
Make sure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
Perform the following procedure to configure both the environment settings of your
web browser and the operator panel before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
NOTE:
• The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be displayed with unreadable characters if the
pages were configured by the language different from the language of your web browser.
Setting Up Internet Explorer®
Setting Up the Display Language
1 Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar.
2 Select Languages in the General tab.
3 Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language list.
Setting the IP Address of the Printer to Non-Proxy
1 Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar.
2 Click LAN Settings under Local Area Network (LAN) Settings in the Connections
tab.
3 Perform either of the following:
•
•
Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box under Proxy server.
Click Advanced, and then specify the IP address of the printer in the Do not use
proxy server for addresses beginning with text box under Exceptions.
Confirming the Menu on the Operator Panel
You can start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool is set to Enable on the operator panel. Check the operator
panel setting if you cannot start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Protocols."
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
139
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
To start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of the printer in
your web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, verify the IP address by using the
operator panel, printing the system settings report, or using the ping command. See
"Verifying the IP Settings."
Page Display Format
Top Frame
The top frame is located at the top of all pages. When the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool is activated, the current status and specifications of the printer are displayed in the
top frame on every page.
2 34
Model Name
Displays the model name of the printer.
IPv4
Displays the IP address of the printer.
IPv6
Location
Displays location of the printer. The location can be changed in the
Basic Information section on the Print Server Settings page.
Contact Person
Displays the name of the printer administrator. The name can be
changed in the Basic Information section on the Print Server
Settings page.
Event Panel
Displays the indicator for the condition of the printer.
Machine image
Shows the bitmap image of the printer. The Printer Status menu
appears in the right frame when you click on the image.
140
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Left Frame
The left frame is located on the left side of all the pages. The menu titles displayed in the
left frame are linked to corresponding menus and pages. You can proceed to the
corresponding page by clicking their characters.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Printer Status
Provides immediate feedback on the printer supply status.
When a toner cartridge is running low, click the order supplies link on
the first screen to order a new toner cartridge.
Printer Jobs
Contains information on the details of the status regarding each
protocol or job.
Printer Settings
Displays the printer settings of the operator panel to configure the
settings from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Print Server Settings
Configures the type of printer interface and the necessary conditions
for communications.
Copy Printer Settings
Copies the printer settings to another printer or printers on the
network.
NOTE:
• You must log in as an administrator to use this setting.
Print Volume
Displays the printing history such as paper usage and restrictions of
color mode usage.
Address Book
Displays or edits the e-mail address, server address, and fax number
entries in the Address Book, or registers new entries.
NOTE:
• You must log in as an administrator to use this setting.
Printer Information
Provides information on service calls, inventory reports, or the status
of current memory and engine code levels.
Tray Management
Provides information about the paper type and size for each tray.
10 E-Mail Server Settings
Overview
Opens the E-Mail Server menu in the Printer Server Settings menu to
configure E-Mail Server settings for Scan to Email, e-mail alert and
forwarding fax to email features.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
141
11
Set Password
Locks the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool with a password so that
the printer settings are not changed inadvertently.
NOTE:
• You must log in as an administrator to use this setting.
12 Online Help
Links to the Dell Support website.
13 Order Supplies at:
Links to the Dell website for ordering supplies.
14 Contact Dell Support at:
15 Dell Document Hub at:
Links to the Dell Support website.
Links to the Dell Document Hub website.
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Right Frame
The right frame is located on the right side of all the pages. The contents of the right
frame correspond to the menu that you select in the left frame. See "Details of the Menu
Items."
Buttons in the Right Frame
1 Refresh Button
Receives the current printer configuration and updates the latest
information in the right frame.
2 Apply New Settings Button
Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool to the printer. The new settings replace the old settings of the
printer.
3 Restore Settings Button
Restores the old settings that existed before any changes were
made. New settings are not submitted to the printer.
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items
Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. When you access these menus, the authentication window
appears on the screen. Enter a user name and password for the printer administrator by
142
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.
The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank (NULL). You can
change only the password in the Set Password page in the Security menu. The user
name cannot be changed. See "Set Password."
Details of the Menu Items
Left Frame
Tab
Menu Item
"Printer Status"
"Printer Status"
"Printer Status"
"Printer Events"
"Printer Information"
"Printer Jobs"
"Printer Jobs"
"Job List"
"Completed Jobs"
"Printer Settings"
"Printer Settings Report"
"Menu Settings"
"Reports"
"Printer Settings"
"System Settings"
"Network Settings"
"USB Settings"
"PCL Settings"
"PS Settings"
"PDF Settings"
"Secure Settings"
"Copy Defaults"
"Copy Color Balance"
"Copy Settings"
"Fax Defaults"
"Fax Settings"
"Scan Defaults"
"Direct Print Defaults / USB Direct
Print Defaults"
"MIFARE Customized Card"
"Printer Maintenance"
"Paper Density"
"Adjust Transfer Belt Unit"
"Adjust 2nd BTR"
"Adjust Fusing Unit"
"Color Registration Adjustments"
“Clean Developer”
"Reset Defaults"
"Initialize Print Meter"
"Clear Stored Jobs"*1
"Non-Dell Toner"
"Adjust Altitude"
"Decrease Ghosting"
"Clock Settings"
"Web Link Customization"
"Print Server Settings"
"Print Server Reports"
"Print Server Setup Page"
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
143
Left Frame
Tab
Menu Item
"E-Mail Server Setup Page"
"Print Server Settings"
"Basic Information"
"Port Settings"
"TCP/IP"
"SMB"
"E-Mail Server"
"Bonjour (mDNS)"
"SNMP"
"Scan to Network Folder"
"SNTP"
"AirPrint"
"Mopria"
“Google Cloud Print”
"Dell Document Hub"*5
"Proxy Server"
"Wi-Fi"*2
"Wi-Fi Direct"*4
"Reset Print Server"
"Security"
"Set Password"
"Authentication System"
"Kerberos Server"
"LDAP Server"
"LDAP Authentication"
"LDAP User Mapping"
"SSL/TLS"
"IPsec"
"802.1x"*3
"IP Filter"
"SMTP Domain Filtering"
"Copy Printer Settings"
"Copy Printer Settings"
"Copy Printer Settings"
"Copy Printer Settings Report"
"Print Volume"
"Print Volume"
"Print Volume"
"Dell ColorTrack"
"Address Book"
"E-Mail Address"
"E-Mail Address"
"E-Mail Group"
"Default Setup"
"Server Address"
"Server Address"
"Phone Book"
"FAX Speed Dial"
"FAX Group"
"Tray Management"
*1
*2
*3
"Tray Management"
This item is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
This item is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
This item is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable.
144
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
*4
*5
Wi-Fi Direct is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Dell Document Hub is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables, hardware, and
specifications of the printer.
Printer Status
The Printer Status tab includes the Printer Status, Printer Events and Printer
Information pages.
Printer Status
Displays the status of the consumables, trays, and covers.
Cyan Toner
Cartridge
Indicates whether the toner, drum cartridge and/or
waste toner box is OK for use, or the toner, drum
cartridge and/or waste toner box needs to be
replaced soon or now.
Magenta Toner
Cartridge
Yellow Toner
Cartridge
Black Toner
Cartridge
Consumables
Cyan Drum
Cartridge
Magenta Drum
Cartridge
Yellow Drum
Cartridge
Black Drum
Cartridge
Waste Toner
Box
Paper Trays
Output Tray
Cover
Printer Type
Status
OK
Indicates that there is some paper in the tray but the
quantity is unknown.
Add Paper
Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.
Capacity
Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.
Size
Displays the size of paper in the tray.
Status
Indicates that the tray is available when OK is
displayed.
Capacity
Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.
Status
Indicates whether the cover is closed or open.
Color Laser is displayed normally.
Printing Speed
Printer Events
When faults occur, the details of all alerts or indications of faults are displayed in the
Printer Events page.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
145
Printer Information
Displays the printer details such as the hardware version and Service Tag Number. This
page can also be displayed by clicking Printer Information in the left frame.
Printer Jobs
The Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed Jobs
pages. These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.
Printer Jobs
The Printer Jobs tab includes the Job List and Completed Jobs pages.
Job List
Displays the jobs that are being processed. Click the Refresh button to update the
screen.
ID
Displays the job ID.
Job Name
Displays the file name of the job being processed.
Owner
Displays the name of the job owner.
Host Name
Displays the name of the host computer.
Job Status
Job Type
Host I/F
Displays the status of the host interface.
Job Submitted Time
Displays the date when the job was submitted.
Completed Jobs
Displays the completed jobs. Up to the last 20 jobs are displayed. Click the Refresh
button to update the screen.
Clear Job History
Deletes job history.
ID
Displays the job ID.
Job Name
Displays the file name of the completed job.
Owner
Displays the name of the job owner.
Host Name
Displays the name of the host computer.
Output Result
Displays the status of the completed job.
Job Type
Impression Number
Displays the total number of pages for the job.
No. of Sheets
Displays the total number of sheets for the job.
Host I/F
Displays the status of the host interface.
Job Submitted Time
Displays the date when the job was submitted.
Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to display the Printer Settings Report, Printer Settings,
and Printer Maintenance tabs and to configure the printer settings.
Printer Settings Report
The Printer Settings Report tab includes the Menu Settings and Reports pages.
146
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Menu Settings
Displays the current settings of the printer menus.
Reports
Prints various types of reports and lists. Click Start to print each report.
System Settings
Panel Settings
PCL Fonts List
PCL Macros List
PS Fonts List
PDF Fonts List
Job History
Error History
Print Meter
Color Test Page
Protocol Monitor
Speed Dial
Address Book
Server Address
Fax Activity
Fax Pending
Stored Documents*
This item is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
Printer Settings
The Printer Settings tab includes System Settings, Network Settings, USB Settings, PCL
Settings, PS Settings, PDF Settings, Secure Settings, Copy Defaults, Copy Color
Balance, Copy Settings, Fax Defaults, Fax Settings, Scan Defaults, Direct Print
Defaults/USB Direct Print Defaults, and MIFARE Customized Card pages.
System Settings
Configures the basic printer settings.
Power Saver Time - Sleep
Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it finishes
a job.
Power Saver Time - Deep Sleep
Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it
has entered Sleep mode.
Power Saver Time - Power Off
Timer*1
Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Power Off mode after it has
entered Deep Sleep mode.
mm / inch
Sets the measurement unit to be used on the touch panel as either
mm or inches.
Screen Brightness
Sets the brightness level of the touch panel.
Control Panel Tone
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel
input is correct, or disables the tone.
Invalid Key Tone
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel
input is incorrect, or disables the tone.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
147
Machine Ready Tone
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes
ready, or disables the tone.
Copy Completed Tone
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a copy job is
complete, or disables the tone.
Job Completed Tone
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job other than a
copy job is complete, or disables the tone.
Fault Tone
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job ends
abnormally, or disables the tone.
Alert Tone
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs,
or disables the tone.
Out of Paper Tone
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out
of paper, or disables the tone.
Low Toner Alert Tone
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low, or
disables the tone.
Auto Clear Alert Tone
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the
printer performs auto clear, or disables the tone.
NFC Authentication Tone*1
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when an NFC card is
placed on the NFC reader for authentication, or disables the tone.
All Tones
Sets the volume of all the alert tones, or disables all the tones.
Low Toner Alert Message
Alerts you if the toner is low.
OffHook Wake Up
Sets whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you
pick up the handset of the external telephone.
Auto Log Print
Sets if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs.
RAM Disk
Sets whether to allocate RAM for the file system for the Secure Print,
Proof Print, Private Mail Box Print, and Public Mail Box Print features.
Panel Language
Used to set the language on the touch panel.
Max E-mail Size
Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.
Auto Reset
Sets the amount of time before the printer automatically resets its
settings to the defaults when no additional settings are made.
Fault Time-out
Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that
stops abnormally.
Default Paper Size
Sets the default print paper size.
Print ID
Sets where to print the user ID on the output paper.
Print Text
Sets whether the printer outputs Page Description Language (PDL)
data which is not supported by the printer as text when the printer
receives it.
Banner Sheet Insert Position
Sets where to insert a banner sheet in the output.
Banner Sheet Specify Tray
Sets from which tray a banner sheet is fed.
Substitute Tray
Sets whether to use another size paper when the paper that is loaded
in the specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the
current job.
Letterhead 2 Sided
Sets whether to print on both sides of letterhead.
A4<>Letter Switch
Sets whether to print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not
available in the paper trays and vice versa.
A5<>Statement Switch
Sets whether to print A5 size jobs on Statement size paper if A5 is not
available in the paper trays and vice versa.
Report 2 Sided Print
Sets whether to print reports on both sides a sheet of paper.
Use Another Tray
Sets whether to show a message to select another tray when the
specified paper is not available in the paper tray.
148
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Resume Printing After Jam
Recovery*2
Sets whether to delete print job after recovering from paper jam.
Tap To Print
Sets whether to add the printer to a mobile device such as a tablet or
a notebook computer by tapping the device to the
(NFC)
reader.
*1
*2
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
This setting does not affect fax job.
Network Settings
Specifies the PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for the printer.
PS Data Format
Sets PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for each
interface.
USB Settings
Specifies USB settings of the printer.
USB Port
Sets whether to enable the USB interface on the printer.
PS Data Format
Sets PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for each
interface.
Job Time-out
Sets the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the
computer.
PCL Settings
Specifies the Printer Control Language (PCL) settings.
Paper Tray
Sets the paper input tray.
Paper Size
Sets the paper size.
Custom Paper Size - Y
Sets the length of custom size paper.
Custom Paper Size - X
Sets the width of custom size paper.
Orientation
Sets how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
2 Sided Print
Sets duplex setting as the default for all print jobs.
Font
Sets the font from the list of registered fonts.
Symbol Set
Sets a symbol set for the specified font.
Font Size
Sets the font size for scalable typographic fonts.
Font Pitch
Sets the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.
Form Line
Sets the number of lines in a page.
Quantity
Sets the number of copies to print.
Image Enhance
Sets whether to enable the Image Enhancement feature.
Hex Dump
Sets whether to help isolate the source of a print job problem. With
Hex Dump selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in
hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not
executed.
Draft Mode
Sets whether to print in the draft mode.
Line Termination
Sets how to handle line terminations.
Default Color
Sets the print color mode as Color or Black. This setting is used for
print jobs without a specified color print mode.
Ignore Form Feed
Sets whether to ignore blank pages that only contain Form Feed
control codes.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
149
PS Settings
Specifies printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript Level3 Compatible
emulation printer language.
PS Error Report
Sets whether the contents of the errors concerning PostScript Level3
Compatible page description language are printed.
PS Job Time-out
Sets the execution time for one PostScript Level3 Compatible job.
Paper Select Mode
Sets the way to select the tray for the PostScript Level3 Compatible
mode.
Default Color
Sets the default color mode for the PostScript Level3 Compatible
mode.
PDF Settings
Specifies the PDF settings.
Quantity
2 Sided Print
Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Print Mode
PDF Password
Sets a password.
Re-enter PDF Password
Confirms the set password.
Collation
Sets whether to sort the output.
Output Size
Layout
Default Color
Detect Job Separator
Sets whether to detect the end of the job in printing PDF files
successively from the USB memory.
Secure Settings
Panel Lock
Sets a limited access to Admin Settings with a password, and to set or change the
password.
Panel Lock Control*
Sets whether to enable/disable password protection for the Admin
Settings.
New Password
Sets a password that is required to access the Admin Settings.
Re-enter Password
Confirms the set password.
Some setting items in the Secure Settings are displayed only when this setting item is enabled.
NOTE:
• You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print
Server Settings.
Functions Control
Specifies whether to lock the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions with a password, and
to set or change the password.
Copy
Sets whether to lock the Copy function with a password.
Scan to E-mail
Sets whether to lock the Scan to Email feature with a password.
Fax
Sets whether to lock the Fax function with a password.
Fax Driver
Sets whether to enable or disable the Fax Driver function.
150
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Scan to Network Folder
Sets whether to lock the Scan to Network Folder feature with a
password.
Scan to Computer
Sets whether to lock the Scan to Computer feature with a password.
PC Scan
Sets whether to lock the PC Scan feature with a password.
Scan to USB
Sets whether to lock the Scan to USB feature with a password.
USB Direct Print
Sets whether to lock the USB Direct Print feature with a password.
ID Copy
Sets whether to enable or disable the ID Copy feature.
USB Service - Show When
Inserted
Sets whether to show the USB Drive Detected screen when a USB
flash drive is inserted into the printer.
Automatic Document Detected
Menu
Sets whether to enable or disable to detect document loaded in the
DADF and show DADF related menus on the touch panel.
New Password
Sets a password that is required to access the Copy, Scan, Fax, and
Print functions.
Re-enter Password
Confirms the set password.
NOTE:
• You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print
Server Settings.
Secure Receive
Allows you to password protect all the incoming faxes. When the Secure Receive feature
is enabled, the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password
is entered on the touch panel.
Secure Receive Set
Sets whether to enable/disable password protection for all incoming
faxes.
New Password
Sets a password for incoming faxes.
Re-enter Password
Confirms the set password.
NOTE:
• You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print
Server Settings.
Desktop Login
Select the user authentication method from either local authentication or remote
authentication. To use the remote authentication method, the LDAP server or the
Kerberos server is required to authenticate the user.
NOTE:
• This is available on Dell S2825cdn.
Desktop Authentication
Sets the authentication method.
Authentication System
Click to display the Authentication System page and to specify the
authentication system settings.
User Login History
Select the check box to enable the User Login History feature.
Edit E-mail From Fields
Sets whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use the Scan to
Email feature.
Reconfirm Recipients
Sets whether to reconfirm before sending fax or scan jobs.
Software Download
Sets whether to enable download of firmware updates.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
151
Display of Network Information
Sets whether to show network information in the message field of the Home screen.
Login Error
Specifies how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to Panel Lock,
Functions Control, and Secure Receive.
Login Error
Displays how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to
Panel Lock, Functions Control, and Secure Receive.
NFC Authentication
Sets whether to enable the authentication using the NFC authentication card.
NOTE:
• This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Set Available Time - Copy/Scan/Fax/Print
Specifies the time to enable the secure setting for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print
functions.
Set Available Time
Start Time
End Time
Recurrence
Secure Job Expiration
NOTE:
• Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
Specifies the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Expiration Mode
Allows you to set the date to delete the files stored as Secure Print in
the RAM disk.
Expiration Time
Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Recurrence
Sets the period to repeat the setting.
Weekly Settings
Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.
Monthly Settings
Sets the day of the month to repeat the setting.
Copy Defaults
Creates your own default Copy settings.
Output Color
Sets whether to print in color or in black and white.
Select Tray
Sets the default input tray.
Collation
Sets whether to sort a copy job.
Reduce/Enlarge
Sets the default reduction/enlargement ratio.
Custom Reduce/Enlarge
Sets the custom reduction/enlargement ratio.
Original Size
Sets the document paper size.
Original Type
Sets the document paper type.
Darken/Lighten
Sets the default copy density.
Sharpness
Sets the default sharpness level.
Color Saturation
Adjusts the saturation of colors to make the colors lighter or darker.
Auto Exposure
Sets whether to suppress the background to enhance text on the
copy.
152
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Auto Exposure Level
Sets the background suppression level.
Copy Color Balance
Specifies the copy color balance.
Copy Settings
Configures the Copy settings.
2 Sided Copying
Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Binding of
Original
Sets the binding position for the two-sided copying.
2-Up
Off
Does not perform multiple-up printing.
Auto
Automatically reduces to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Manual
Specify the reduce/enlarge ratio in Reduce/Enlarge.
Margin
Top/Bottom
Sets the value of the top and bottom margins.
Margin
Left/Right
Sets the value of the left and right margins.
Margin Middle
Sets the value of the middle margin.
Fax Defaults
Creates your own default Fax settings.
Resolution
Standard
Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.
Fine
Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or
documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine
Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super
fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the
Super Fine resolution.
Photo
Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
2 Sided
Scanning
Sets whether to scan both sides of a document.
Binding of
Original
Sets the binding position for the two-sided scanning.
Darken/Lighten
Sets the default density to fax your documents lighter or darker.
Delayed Send
Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified
time.
Fax Settings
Configures the Fax settings.
NOTE:
• You cannot set up the items on the Fax Settings page unless you set up the country code under
Country.
Fax Number
Allows you to enter the fax number of the printer to be printed on the
header of faxes.
Country
Sets the country where the printer is used.
Fax Header
Name
Allows you to enter a name to be printed on the header of faxes.
Line Type
Sets the default line type; Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
or Private Branch Exchange (PBX).
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
153
Line Monitor
Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a
transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.
DRPD Pattern
Sets the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting from
Pattern1 to Pattern7.
DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies.
Receive Mode
Telephone
Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking
up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing a remote
receive code, or by tapping Manual Receive in On Hook and then
tapping Receive. For details about Manual Receive, see "Receiving
a Fax Manually."
Fax
Automatically receives faxes.
Telephone/Fax
When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone
rings for the time specified in Auto Receive Tel/Fax, and then the
printer receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps
from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.
Ans
Machine/Fax
The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In
this mode, the printer monitors the fax signal and pick up the line if
there are fax tones. If the telephone communication in your country
is serial, this mode is not supported.
DRPD
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a
distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the
telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a
separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure
the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.
Ring Tone
Volume
Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming
call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive
Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.
Auto Receive
Fax
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after answering an incoming call.
Auto Receive
Tel/Fax
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after the external telephone receives an incoming call.
Auto Receive
Answer/Fax
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.
Junk Fax Setup
Sets whether to reject unwanted faxes by accepting only the faxes
from the numbers registered in the Phone Book.
2 Sided Printing
Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Remote Receive
Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on
the external telephone.
Remote Receive
Tone
Sets a 2-digit remote receive code when Remote Receive is On.
Discard Size
Sets whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page
when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper. Selecting
Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the
output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the bottom
of the page.
Received Fax
Forward
Sets your printer to forward incoming faxes to another fax number, to
e-mail addresses, or to a server.
Forwarding
Number
Allows you to enter the fax number of the destination to which
incoming faxes are forwarded.
Forwarding
E-mail Address 1
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to
be forwarded.
Forwarding
E-mail Address 2
154
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Forwarding
E-mail Address 3
Forwarding
E-mail Address 4
Forwarding
E-mail Address 5
Server Type
Sets the server type.
Server Address
Sets the server address registered under the server ID.
Server Port
Number
Sets the server port number.
Login Name
Sets the login name.
Login Password
Sets the login password.
Re-enter
Password
Enter the password again to check it.
Share Name
Sets the shared name.
Server Path
Sets the server path.
Redial Attempts
Sets the number of redial attempts to make if the destination fax
number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer does not redial.
Interval of
Redial
Sets the interval between redial attempts.
Resend Delay
Sets the interval between re-send attempts.
Tone/Pulse
Sets whether to use tone or pulse dialing.
Prefix Dial
Sets whether to set a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial
Number
Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before
any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private
Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).
Fax Cover Page
Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
Fax Header
Sets whether to print the information of the sender on the header of
faxes.
ECM
Sets whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the
ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.
Modem Speed
Allows you to adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or
reception error occurs.
Display Manual
Fax Recipients
Sets whether to show the fax number of the recipient on the
Sending Fax screen when manually sending a fax.
Fax Activity
Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50
incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Fax Transmit
Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.
Fax Broadcast
Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.
Fax Protocol
Sets whether to print the protocol monitor report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.
Scan Defaults
Creates your own default Scan settings.
File Format
Sets the file format in which scanned data is to be saved.
Output Color
Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white.
Resolution
Sets the default scan resolution.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
155
Original Size
Sets the document paper size.
2 Sided Scanning
Sets whether to scan both sides of a document.
Binding of Original
Sets the binding position for the two-sided scanning.
Darken/Lighten
Sets the default scan density.
Sharpness
Sets the default sharpness level.
Contrast
Sets the default contrast level.
Auto Exposure
Sets whether to suppress the background to enhance text on the
scanned data.
Auto Exposure Level
Sets the default background suppression level.
Margin Top/Bottom
Sets the value of the top and bottom margins.
Margin Left/Right
Sets the value of the left and right margins.
Margin Middle
Sets the value of the middle margin.
TIFF File Format
Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6 or TTN2.
Image Compression
Sets the image compression level.
File Naming Mode
Sets the detailed settings of File Naming Mode to Auto, Add Prefix or
Add Suffix.
Prefix/Suffix String
Sets the texts that are added when Add Prefix or Add Suffix are
selected.
Create Folder
Sets whether to create a folder when saving scanned data.
Direct Print Defaults / USB Direct Print Defaults
NOTE:
• For Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw, Direct Print Defaults is displayed. For Dell S2825cdn, USB
Direct Print Defaults is displayed.
Creates your own Direct Print Defaults / USB Direct Print Defaults setting.
Output Color
Sets whether to print in color or in black and white.
Select Tray
Sets the default input tray.
2 Sided Printing
Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Layout
Sets Displays the default paper layout when Layout is selected.
Image Types
Sets the print image quality when printing documents.
Collation
Sets whether to sort the output.
PDF Password
Sets a password.
Re-enter PDF Password
Confirms the set password.
MIFARE Customized Card
Registers SSFC formatted NFC ID cards.
User ID Block 1
Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.
User ID Block 2
Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.
User ID Block 3
Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.
NOTE:
• This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Printer Maintenance
The Printer Maintenance tab includes the Paper Density, Adjust Transfer Belt Unit,
Adjust 2nd BTR, Adjust Fusing Unit, Color Registration Adjustments, Clean Developer,
156
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Reset Defaults, Initialize Print Meter, Clear Stored Jobs, Non-Dell Toner, Adjust
Altitude, Decrease Ghosting, Clock Settings, and Web Link Customization pages.
Paper Density
Specifies the paper density for the plain paper and labels.
Adjust Transfer Belt Unit
Adjusts the transfer bias when the faint image of the previous page, a part of the page
currently printing, etc. appear on the output.
K Offset
If faint black colored ghosts appear, try to decrease the value.
YMC Offset
If faint ghosts in color (yellow, magenta, or cyan) appear, try to
decrease the value.
Adjust 2nd BTR
Specifies the optimum voltage settings for printing for the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd
BTR). To lower the voltage, set negative values. To increase, set positive values. If you see
mottles on the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the
print output, try to decrease the voltage.
NOTE:
• The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Plain(60-90g/m2)
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for each paper
type.
Plain Thick(91-105g/m2)
Covers(106-176g/m2)
Covers Thick(177-220g/m2)
Coated(106-176g/m2)
Coated Thick(177-220g/m2)
Label
Envelope
Recycled
Adjust Fusing Unit
Specifies the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fusing unit. To lower the
temperature, set negative values. To increase, set positive values. When the printouts are
curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper
properly, try to increase the temperature.
NOTE:
• The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Plain(60-90g/m2)
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for each paper type.
Plain Thick(91-105g/m )
Covers(106-176g/m2)
Covers Thick(177-220g/m2)
Coated(106-176g/m2)
Coated Thick(177-220g/m2)
Label
Envelope
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
157
Recycled
Color Registration Adjustments
Specifies whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment.
Clean Developer
Stirs the developer in the drum cartridge.
Clean Developer
Click Start to stir the developer in the drum cartridge.
Toner Refresh
Expels the toner in the drum cartridge, and supplies the fresh toner
from the toner cartridge.
Reset Defaults
Initializes the non-volatile (NV) memory. After executing this setting and restarting the
printer, all the menu parameters are reset to their default values.
Reset Defaults
User Fax Section
and restart
printer.
Click Start to reset the fax number entries in the Address Book.
Reset Defaults
User Scan
Section and
restart printer.
Click Start to reset the e-mail and server address entries in the
Address Book.
Reset Defaults
User Account
Section and
restart printer.*
Click Start to reset the user account entries.
Reset Defaults
User App
Section and
restart printer.*
Click Start to reset the user application entries.
Reset Defaults
System Section
and restart
printer.
Click Start to reset the system parameters.
Power On
Wizard
Click Start to perform the initial setup for the printer.
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Initialize Print Meter
Initializes the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter
count is reset to 0.
Clear Stored Jobs
NOTE:
• Clear Stored Jobs feature is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
Clears all files stored in the RAM disk.
All
158
Click Start to clear all files stored as Secure Print, Proof Print, Private
Mail Box Print, and Public Mail Box Print in the RAM disk.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Secure Document
Click Start to clear all files stored as Secure Print, Proof Print, Private
Mail Box Print, and Public Mail Box Print in the RAM disk.
Stored Document
Click Start to clear all files stored in the RAM disk.
Non-Dell Toner
Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
CAUTION:
• Using a non-Dell toner cartridge may severely damage the printer. The warranty does not cover
damages caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.
Adjust Altitude
Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric
pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the
printer is being used.
Decrease Ghosting
Reduces negative ghost.
Clock Settings
Specifies the clock settings.
Date Format
Time Format
Time Zone
Set Date
Set Time
Web Link Customization
Specifies a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from Order
Supplies at: in the left frame.
Select Reorder URL
Sets a URL to be linked to Order Supplies at:
Regular
Displays the regular URL (http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that
can be linked to Order Supplies at:.
Premier
Displays the premier URL (http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked
to Order Supplies at:.
Print Server Settings
Use the Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and the necessary
conditions for communication.
Print Server Reports
The Print Server Reports tab includes the Print Server Setup Page and the E-Mail Server
Setup Page.
Print Server Setup Page
Displays the current settings of the print server.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
159
E-Mail Server Setup Page
Displays the current settings of the e-mail server.
Print Server Settings
The Print Server Settings tab includes the Basic Information, Port Settings, TCP/IP,
SMB, E-Mail Server, Bonjour (mDNS), SNMP, Scan to Network Folder, SNTP, AirPrint,
Mopria, Google Cloud Print, Dell Document Hub, Proxy Server, Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct, and
Reset Print Server pages.
Basic Information
Configures basic information of the printer.
System Settings Printer Name
Location
Sets the location of the printer.
Contact Person Sets the contact name, number, and other information of the printer
administrator and service center.
Administrator
E-Mail Address
Sets the contact address of the printer administrator and service
center.
Asset Tag
Number
Dell Printer
Configuration
Web Tool
Settings
Auto Refresh
Automatically refreshes the contents of the status display pages.
Auto Refresh
Interval
Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents of the status display
pages automatically.
NOTE:
• The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame, Printer Status page, Job
List page, and Completed Jobs page.
Port Settings
Enables or disables printing ports and management protocol features.
Ethernet*1
Ethernet
Settings
Auto
Detects the Ethernet transmission rate and the
duplex mode.
10Base-T
Half-Duplex
Specifies as the default value.
10Base-T
Full-Duplex
100Base-TX
Half-Duplex
100Base-TX
Full-Duplex
1000Base-T
Full-Duplex
Current
Ethernet
Settings
MAC Address
Port Status
160
Energy Efficient
Ethernet
Select the check box to enable the Energy Efficient
Ethernet feature.
LPD
Sets whether to enable each item.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Port9100
IPP
WSD Print
WSD Scan
Network
TWAIN
FTP
SMB
Bonjour
(mDNS)
E-Mail Alert
Telnet
SNMP
Update Address
Book
SNTP
Google Cloud
Print
Print from Dell
Document
Hub*2
Scan to Dell
Document
Hub*2
*1
*2
This item is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable.
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
NOTE:
• The settings in the Port Settings page become valid only when the printer is restarted. When you
change or configure the settings, click the Apply New Settings button to apply the new settings.
TCP/IP
Configures the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the printer.
TCP/IP Settings IP Mode
Host Name
IPv4
IP Address
Mode
Sets the method for acquiring the IP address.
Manual IP
Address
When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is
allocated to the printer using the format
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254.
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot
be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.
Manual Subnet When an IP address is being set manually, the
Mask
subnet mask is specified using the format
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.
255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet
mask.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
161
Manual
Gateway
Address
IPv6
When an IP address is being set manually, the
gateway address is specified using the format
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254.
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot
be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.
Enable Stateless Select the check box to enable the stateless
Address
address.
Use Manual
Address
Select the check box to set the IP address manually.
Get IP Address
from DHCP
Allows you to enable or disable the automatic
setting of the IP address via DHCP.
Manual Address Sets the IP address. To specify an IPv6 address, enter
the address followed by a slash (/) and then "64." For
details, contact your system administrator.
Manual
Gateway
Address
DNS
DNS Domain
Name
IPv4
Get DNS Server Allows you to enable or disable the automatic
setting of the DNS server address via DHCP.
Address from
DHCP
Manual DNS
Server Address
IPv6
WINS
Manually sets the DNS server address in
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when Get DNS Server
Address from DHCP is not selected.
Get DNS Server Select the check box to get the DNS server address
Address from
automatically from the DHCPv6-lite server.
DHCPv6-lite
Manual DNS
Server Address
162
Sets the gateway address.
Sets the DNS server address.
DNS Dynamic
Update (IPv4)
Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to
DNS.
DNS Dynamic
Update (IPv6)
Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to
DNS.
Auto Generate
Search List
Select the check box to automatically generate the
search list.
Search Domain
Name
Sets the search domain name. Up to 255
alphanumeric characters, periods, and hyphens can
be used. If you need to specify more than one
domain name, separate them using a comma or
semicolon.
Time-out
Sets the time-out period.
Priority to IPv6
DNS Name
Resolution
Select the check box to enable the DNS Name
Resolution feature.
WINS Mode
Allows you to enable or disable the automatic
setting of the primary and secondary WINS server
addresses via DHCP.
WINS Primary
Server
Manually sets the primary WINS server address in
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when WINS Mode is not
selected.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
WINS
Secondary
Server
Manually sets the secondary WINS server address in
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when WINS Mode is not
selected.
LPD
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
Port9100
Port Number
Sets the port number from 9000 to 9999.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
Printer URI
Displays the printer URI.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
Port Number
Displays the port number for receiving requests
from the client.
Maximum
Sessions
Displays the maximum number of connections
received simultaneously by the client.
Port Number
Sets the port number to 80 or from 8000 to 9999.
Receive
Time-Out
Sets the receive time-out period.
Notification
Time-Out
Sets the notification time-out period.
Maximum
Number of TTL
Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.
Maximum
Number of
Notification
Sets the maximum number of notifications from 10
to 20.
IPP
WSD
Network TWAIN Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
FTP
Password
Sets the password for FTP.
Re-enter
Password
Enter the password again to check it.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
Port Number
Sets the port number to 80 or from 8000 to 9999.
Simultaneous
Connections
Displays the maximum number of simultaneous
connections.
CSRF
Protection
Select the check box to enable the CSRF Protection.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
Password
Sets the password for Telnet.
Re-enter
Password
Confirms the set password.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
Update Address Connection
Book
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
HTTP
Telnet
To configure the IP Filter feature, enter an IP address to be filtered in the Address text
box and the subnet mask in the Address Mask text box. Enter a numeric value between 0
and 255 in each text box. "*" is appended to the current value.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
163
IP Filter Setup Procedure
You can set up to a maximum of five items and the first item set takes priority. When
setting multiple filters, enter the shortest address first followed by a slightly longer
address, a longer address and so on.
Enabling Printing From a Specified User
The following describes the procedure to enable printing only from the "192.0.2.1" IP
address.
1 Click the first column of the Access List row 1.
2 Enter "192.0.2.1" in the Address text box and "255.255.255.255" in the Address
Mask text box.
3 Select Accept.
4 Click Apply New Settings.
Disabling Printing From a Specified User
The following describes the procedure to disable printing only from the "192.0.2.1" IP
address.
1 Click the first column of the Access List row 1.
2 Enter "192.0.2.1" in the Address text box and "255.255.255.255" in the Address
Mask text box.
3 Select Reject.
4 Click the first column of the Access List row 2.
5 Enter "0.0.0.0" in the Address text box and "0.0.0.0" in the Address Mask text
box.
6 Select Accept.
7 Click Apply New Settings.
Enabling and Disabling Printing from Network Addresses
You can enable printing from the "192.168" network address and disable printing from
the "192.0.2" network address.
The following example describes how to enable printing from the "192.0.2.1" IP
address.
1 Click the first column of the Access List row 1.
2 Enter "192.0.2.1" in the Address text box and "255.255.255.255" in the Address
Mask text box.
3 Select Accept.
4 Click the first column of the Access List row 2.
5 Enter "192.0.2.0" in the Address text box and "255.255.255.0" in the Address
Mask text box.
6 Select Reject.
164
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
7 Click the first column of the Access List row 3.
8 Enter "192.0.0.0" in the Address text box and "255.255.0.0" in the Address Mask
text box.
9 Select Accept.
10 Click Apply New Settings.
SMB
Specifies the setting of the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.
Host Name
Sets the host name of the server computer.
Workgroup
Sets the workgroup.
Maximum Sessions
Sets the maximum number of sessions.
Unicode Support
Sets whether to notify the host name and workgroup name in
Unicode characters during SMB transmission.
Auto Master Mode
Sets whether to enable the Auto Master Mode.
Encrypt Password
Sets whether to encrypt the password.
Job Time-Out
Sets the job time-out period.
Connection Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
E-Mail Server
Configures detailed settings of E-Mail Server, E-Mail Alert and E-Mail Report. This page
can also be displayed by clicking E-Mail Server Settings Overview in the left frame.
E-Mail Server
Settings
Primary SMTP
Gateway
Sets the primary SMTP gateway.
SMTP Port
Number
Sets the SMTP port number. This must be 25, 587 or
between 5000 and 65535.
E-Mail Send
Authentication
Sets the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.
SMTP Login
User
Sets the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric
characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at
symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than
one address, separate them using commas.
SMTP Login
Password
Sets the SMTP account password using up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter SMTP
Login Password
Confirms the set SMTP account password.
POP3 Server
Address*
Sets the POP3 server address in IP address format of
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd or as a DNS host name using up to
63 characters.
POP3 Port
Number*
Sets the POP3 server port number. This must be 110
or between 5000 and 65535.
POP User
Name*
Sets the POP3 account user name. Up to 63
alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens,
underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If
specifying more than one address, separate them
using commas.
POP User
Password*
Sets the POP3 account password using up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
165
E-Mail Alert
Settings
Re-enter POP
User Password*
Confirms the set password.
Reply Address
Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each
E-mail Alert.
SMTP Server
Connection
Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.
E-Mail List 1
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail
Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts
List 1
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for
consumables.
Paper Handling Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for
Alerts
paper handling.
Service Call
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for
Service Calls.
E-Mail List 2
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail
Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts
List 2
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for
consumables.
Paper Handling Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for
Alerts
paper handling.
Service Call
E-Mail Report
Settings
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for
Service Calls.
History Report
Sets whether to receive the job history report by
e-mail after every 20 print, copy, scan, and fax jobs.
Statistics
Report
Sets whether to receive the statistic report by e-mail
on the use of print, copy, scan, and fax.
Volume Report
Sets whether to receive the print volume report by
e-mail.
Transmission
Time
Sets what time the reports are sent.
Recurrence
Sets at what recurrence the reports are sent.
Weekly Settings
(for Weekly
only)
Sets the day of the week the reports are sent.
Monthly
Settings (for
Monthly only)
Sets the day of the month the reports are sent.
Destination
E-Mail Address
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which the
reports are sent to.
Destination
E-Mail Address
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which the
reports are sent to.
This item is available only when POP before SMTP (Plain) or POP before SMTP (APOP) for E-Mail Send
Authentication is selected.
Bonjour (mDNS)
Configures the detailed settings of Bonjour.
166
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
LAN1*
LAN2*
Host Name
Sets the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and "-"
(hyphen). The original setting remains valid if no input is made.
Printer Name
Sets the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol
sets. The original setting remains valid if no input is made.
Wide-Area
Bonjour
Select the check box to enable the Wide-Area Bonjour protocol.
Host Name
Sets the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol
sets. The original setting remains valid if no input is made.
Printer Name
Sets the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol
sets. The original setting remains valid if no input is made.
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
SNMP
Configures the detailed settings of SNMP.
SNMP
Configuration*1
Enable SNMP
Select the check box to enable the SNMP v1/v2c protocol.
v1/v2c Protocol
Edit SNMP
v1/v2c
Properties
Click to display the SNMP v1/v2c page and to edit the setting of
SNMP v1/v2c protocol from the page.
Enable SNMP v3 Select the check box to enable the SNMP v3 protocol.
Protocol
Edit SNMP v3
Properties
Click to display the SNMP v3 page and to edit the setting of SNMP v3
protocol from the page.
You can click this item only when SSL communication is enabled.
Community
Name
Community
Name (Read
only)*2
Sets the community name to access (read only) data using up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
The original setting remains valid if no input is made. Characters
entered for community name in the previous settings are not
displayed on the screen. The default Read Community is public.
Re-enter
Community
Name (Read
only)*2
Enters the community name to access (read only) data again to check
it.
Community
Name
(Read/Write)*2
Sets the community name to access (read and write) data using up to
31 alphanumeric characters.
The original setting remains valid if no input is made. Characters
entered for community name in the previous settings are not
displayed on the screen. The default Read/Write Community is
private.
Re-enter
Community
Name
(Read/Write)*2
Enters the community name to access (read and write) data again to
check it.
Community
Name (Trap)*2
Sets the community name used for trap up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
The original setting remains valid if no input is made. Characters
entered for Community Name (Trap) in the previous settings are not
displayed on the screen. The default Trap Community is " " (NULL).
Re-enter
Community
Name (Trap)*2
Enters the community name used for trap again to check it.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
167
Trap
Trap Address
Notification 1-4 Type
Select the check boxes to notify trap occurrence. In this case, specify
the IP address and IP socket in the following format:
Trap Address
IPv4
Port Number
Specify the IP address and IP socket in the
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm format. Each section of nnn is a variable
value between 0 and 255. Note that values 127 and 224-254 are not
valid for the first three-digits only. IP socket mmmmm is a variable
value between 0 and 65,535.
Notify
Network*3
IPv6
Specify the IP address and IP socket in the
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmmmm format. Each
section of XXXX is a hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff. IP
socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65,535.
Authenticate
Error Trap
*1
*2
*3
Select the check box to notify Authenticate Error Trap.
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
The default value can be changed by using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
This item is available only when Wi-Fi Direct is set to Enable.
The Wi-Fi Direct feature is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
SNMP v3 *
Edits the detailed settings of SNMP v3 protocol.
To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v3 Properties in the SNMP page.
Administrator
Account
Account
Enabled
Select the check box to enable the administrator account.
User Name
Enters the user name of the administrator account.
Authentication Sets the authentication password of the administrator account using
Password
8 to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter
Confirms the set password.
Authentication
Password
Print Drivers /
Remote Client
Account
Privacy
Password
Sets the privacy password of the administrator account using 8 to 32
alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter
Privacy
Password
Confirms the set password.
Account
Enabled
Select the check box to enable the print drivers and remote client
account.
Reset to default Click to reset the password for the print drivers and remote client
Password
account to default.
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Scan to Network Folder
Specifies the client when scanning data.
FTP Client
168
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
FTP Passive
Sets whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
SMB Client
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
SMB Protocol
Sets the SMB protocol.
SNTP
Configures the SNTP server settings in order to perform time synchronization through
SNTP.
SNTP
IP Address /
Host Name
Sets the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
Time
Sets the interval for performing time synchronization using SNTP.
Synchronization
Interval
Last
Connection
Time
Displays the last date and time when the printer was connected to the
SNTP server.
Connection
Status
Displays the status of the connections between the SNTP server and
the printer.
AirPrint
Configures the detailed setting of AirPrint.
AirPrint
Bonjour
IPP
Authentication
Enable AirPrint Select the check box to enable the printer for AirPrint.
Enable USB
Select the check box to enable IPP over USB. When you disable
Enable AirPrint, this setting will be disabled automatically.
Name
Enter the name that is to be displayed as an AirPrint printer.
Location
Enter the location of the printer.
Geo-Location
Enter the physical location of the printer.
Basic
Select the check box to enable the basic authentication scheme.
Authentication
User Name
Enter the user name.
Password
Enter the user password.
Re-enter
Password
Re-enter the user password for confirmation.
Scan
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the time duration until the connection becomes time-out.
SSL/TLS*
SSL/TLS
Click Settings to display the SSL/TLS page.
Supply Levels
Cyan Toner
Cartridge
Displays the toner level.
Magenta Toner
Cartridge
Yellow Toner
Cartridge
Black Toner
Cartridge
This item is displayed only when Wi-Fi Direct is set to Enable.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
169
Mopria
Enable to use Mopria Print Service.
NOTE:
• The Enable button is disabled, when both Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP are enabled.
Google Cloud Print
Registers the printer to Google Cloud Print.
Google Cloud
Print*
(Registration
state)
Displays the Google Cloud Print registration state.
Register This
Device to
Google Cloud
Print
Click to register the printer to Google Cloud Print.
Google Cloud Print can only be used when the printer is using IPv4.
Dell Document Hub
Configures the connections to the Dell Document Hub Server.
NOTE:
• Dell Document Hub is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Dell Document
Hub
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the time duration until the connection becomes time-out.
Polling Interval Sets the interval time for polling.
Proxy Server
Configures the Proxy Server settings.
Proxy Server
Use Proxy
Server
Sets whether to enable the use of a proxy server.
Address to
Bypass Proxy
Server
Sets the address to bypass proxy server.
Server Name
Sets the name of the proxy server.
Port Number
Sets the port number from 1 to 65535.
Authentication Sets whether to enable authentication.
Login Name
Sets the login name for the proxy server.
Password
Sets the login password for the proxy server.
Re-enter
Password
Confirms the set password.
Wi-Fi
NOTE:
• Wi-Fi feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Configures the detailed setting for the wireless network.
To use the wireless network, make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable.
NOTE:
• Once Wi-Fi is activated, wired LAN protocol is disabled.
170
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Wi-Fi Settings
Security
Settings
Wi-Fi
Sets whether to enable the Wi-Fi connection.
SSID
Sets the name that identifies the wireless network.
Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Network Type
Sets the network type from either Ad-Hoc or
Infrastructure.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of the printer.
Link Channel
Displays the channel number of the wireless
connection for the printer.
Link Quality
Displays the quality of the wireless network
connection for the printer.
Encryption
Select the encryption type from the list.
No Security
Sets No Security to configure the wireless setting
without specifying an encryption type from WEP,
WPA-PSK, and WPA-Enterprise.
WEP
Sets the WEP to use through the wireless network.
WPA-PSK
Sets the WPA-PSK AES/WPA2-PSK AES to use
AES/WPA2-PSK through the wireless network.
AES*1, 2
WPA-Enterprise Sets the WPA-Enterprise AES/WPA2-Enterprise AES
-AES/WPA2to use through the wireless network.
Enterprise-AES*
2, 3
WEP
Mixed Mode
PSK*1, 2
Sets the Mixed Mode PSK to use through the
wireless network. Mixed Mode PSK automatically
selects the encryption type from either WPA-PSK
AES or WPA2-PSK AES.
Mixed Mode
Enterprise*2, 3
Sets the Mixed Mode Enterprise to use through the
wireless network. Mixed Mode Enterprise
automatically selects the encryption type from
either WPA-Enterprise AES or WPA2-Enterprise AES.
Encryption
Select the WEP key code from either Hex or Ascii.
WEP Key 1
Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless
network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is
selected for Encryption.
Re-enter WEP
Key 1
Enters the WEP key 1 again to check it.
WEP Key 2
Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless
network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is
selected for Encryption.
Re-enter WEP
Key 2
Enters the WEP key 2 again to check it.
WEP Key 3
Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless
network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is
selected for Encryption.
Re-enter WEP
Key 3
Enters the WEP key 3 again to check it.
WEP Key 4
Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless
network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is
selected for Encryption.
Re-enter WEP
Key 4
Enters the WEP key 4 again to check it.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
171
WPA-PSK
Transmit Key*5
Sets the transmit key type from the list.
Passphrase
Sets the passphrase.
Re-enter
Passphrase/Key
Enters the passphrase again to check it.
WPA-Enterprise EAP-Identity
Sets the EAP-Identity for the authentication.
*4
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Authentication
Method
Shows the authentication method.
Login Name
Sets the login name for the authentication.
Password
Sets the password.
Re-enter
Password
Enters the password again to check it.
For encryption, AES method is used.
This item is available only when Infrastructure is selected for Network Type.
For authentication and encryption by digital certificate, AES method is used.
To activate the setting, import a certificate which supports wireless LAN (server/client) on the SSL/TLS pages,
and enable the relevant certificate in advance.
When Auto is selected for Transmit Key, the key set specified for WEP Key 1 is used.
Wi-Fi Direct
Configures the detailed setting of the Wi-Fi Direct connection.
NOTE:
• Wi-Fi Direct is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Wi-Fi Direct
Group Owner
Status
Wi-Fi Direct
Sets whether to enable the Wi-Fi Direct connection.
Group Role
Sets the group role of the printer.
Device Name
Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network
with up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Check it when selecting the
printer name on your mobile device.
WPS Setup
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup
(WPS).
SSID (Character Specifies a name to identify the Wi-Fi Direct network. Up to 32
string following alphanumeric characters can be entered. "DIRECT-" cannot be
changed.
"DIRECT-**")
Passphrase
Displays the passphrase. Check it when entering the passphrase into
your mobile device.
IP Address
Displays the IP address of the Wi-Fi Direct adapter.
Subnet Mask
Displays the subnet mask.
Paired Device
Displays the mobile name currently connected.
Current Role
Displays the current group role of the printer.
Current SSID
Displays the current SSID. Check it selecting the Wi-Fi Direct network
name on your mobile device.
Reset Print Server
Initializes NVRAM (non-volatile RAM) for the network feature and restarts the printer. You
can also initialize NVRAM of the printer from Reset Defaults in the Printer Settings
menu.
Initialize NIC NVRAM Memory
and restart printer.
172
Click Start to initialize NVRAM, revert network settings to the factory
default settings, and restart the network capability.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Restart Printer
Click Start to restart the printer.
Security
The Security tab includes Set Password, Authentication System, Kerberos Server, LDAP
Server, LDAP Authentication, LDAP User Mapping, SSL/TLS, IPsec, 802.1x, IP Filter, and
SMTP Domain Filtering pages.
Set Password
Specifies the password that is required to access the setup parameters of the printer
from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. This page can also be displayed by
clicking Set Password in the left frame.
NOTE:
• To restore the password to the default (NULL), initialize the non-volatile memory (NVM).
• You can set the password for access to Admin Settings.
Administrator Password
Sets the password using up to 128 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter Administrator Password Confirms the set password.
Access denial by the
authentication failure of the
Administrator
Sets the amount of time the administrator should wait for the access
to the printer setup from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. The
access is denied if the time-out time is exceeded. If you set 0, this
mode is disabled.
Authentication System
Specifies the server authentication type, the server response time-out, or the search
time-out.
Authentication
Type
Authentication Select the authentication system from the list.
System Settings
Authentication
Type (for
ColorTrack
PRO)*
Authentication Select the authentication system from the list. When the server you
System Settings are accessing uses the Kerberos authentication, select Kerberos
(Windows) as the authentication method and specify the server
settings in "Kerberos Server."
Optional
Information
Server
Response
Time-Out
Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for response from the
server.
Search
Time-Out
Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for searching for the
server.
This is available on Dell S2825cdn.
Kerberos Server
Specifies the settings for the Kerberos server.
Kerberos Server IP Address /
Host Name &
Port
Domain Name
Kerberos Server IP Address /
(for ColorTrack Host Name &
PRO)*
Port
Domain Name
Sets the IP address or host name, and the port address. The port
address must be 88 or between 5000 and 65535.
Specifies each information.
Sets the IP address or host name, and the port address. The port
address must be 88 or between 5000 and 65535.
Enter the domain name.
This is available on Dell S2825cdn.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
173
LDAP Server
Specifies the settings of the LDAP server.
Server
Information
Optional
Information
IP Address /
Host Name &
Port
Sets IP address or the host name, and the port address. The port
address must be 389, 3268, or between 5000 and 65535.
LDAP Server
Displays the current software information of the LDAP server.
Search
Enters the search directory root.
Directory Root
Login
Credentials to
Access LDAP
Server
Select credential used to access the LDAP server.
Login Name
Enters the login name.
Password
Enters the login password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters. If
the password is left blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server.
Re-enter
Password
Enters the login password again to check it.
Search
Time-Out
Select Wait LDAP Server Limit to follow the time specified by the
LDAP server. Select Wait to specify the time.
Search Name
Order
Sets the search order.
Server Address
Book
Select the check box to enable the server address book.
Server Phone
Book
Select the check box to enable the server phone book.
Server
IP Address /
Information (for Host Name &
ColorTrack
Port
PRO)*
LDAP Server
Sets IP address or the host name, and the port address. The port
address must be 389, 636, 3268, 3269, or between 5000 and 65535.
When LDAPS communication is required, set the port number to 636,
and when you use the global catalog, set the port number to 3269.
Displays the current software information of the LDAP server.
Optional
Search
Enter the search directory root.
Information (for Directory Root
ColorTrack
PRO)*
Login Name
Enter the login name.
Password
Enter the login password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter
Password
Enter the login password again to confirm it.
Search
Time-Out
Select Wait LDAP Server Limit to follow the time specified by the
LDAP server. Select Wait to specify the time.
This is available on Dell S2825cdn.
NOTE:
• Server Address Book must be set to On before you can use the server address book for the Scan to
Email feature.
• Server Phone Book must be set to On before you can use the server phone book for the Fax
function.
LDAP Authentication
Specifies the LDAP server authentication method.
174
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
LDAP
Authentication
Authentication Shows the authentication method.
Method
Use Added Text Select whether to use the added text string from the list.
String
Text String
Added to User
Name
LDAP
Authentication
(for ColorTrack
PRO)*
Enter the added text string.
Specifies the LDAP server authentication method.
Authentication Shows the authentication method.
Method
Use Added Text Select whether to use the added text string from the list.
String
Text String
Added to User
Name
Enter the added text string.
This is available on Dell S2825cdn.
LDAP User Mapping
Specifies the settings of the LDAP user mapping.
Common Name
Sets the attribute type of the common name set for the LDAP server.
Surname
Sets the attribute type of the surname set for the LDAP server.
Given Name
Sets the attribute type of the given name set for the LDAP server.
E-mail Address
Sets the attribute type of the e-mail address set for the LDAP server.
Fax Phone
Sets the attribute type of the fax phone number set for the LDAP
server.
SSL/TLS
Specifies the settings for the SSL encryption communication to the printer, and
set/delete the certificate used for IPsec, LDAPS, or Wi-Fi.
NOTE:
• Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
SSL/TLS
HTTP - SSL/TLS Select the check box to enable the HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication.
Communication
*1
HTTP - SSL/TLS Sets the port number, which is not identical with that of HTTP for
Communication SSL/TLS. This must be 443 or between 8000 and 9999.
Port Number
LDAP - SSL/TLS Select the check box to enable the LDAP, and access is established
Communication using SSL/TLS communication.
*1
SMTP - SSL/TLS Sets the type of SSL/TLS used to communicate with the SMTP server.
Communication
MD5
Generate
Self-Signed
Certificate*2
Select the check box to enable the MD5.
Click to display the Generate Self-Signed Certificate page and to
create a security certification from the page. The Generate
Self-Signed Certificate button is available only when the self-signed
certificate is not generated.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
175
Public Key
Method
Select the public key method of the self-signed certificate.
Size of Public
Key
Select the size of public key.
Issuer
Sets the issuer of SSL self-signed certificate.
Validity
Enters the valid days from 1 to 9999 days.
Generate Signed Click to generate the SSL self-signed certificate.
Certificate
Certificate
Signing
Request (CSR)
Click to display the Certificate Signing Request (CSR) page and to
create a certificate signing request from the page.
Digital Signature Select the digital signature algorithm.
Algorithm
Public Key Size
Select the public key size.
2 Letter Country Enter the 2-letter country code.
Code (Required)
State / Province Enter the state or province name up to 16 bytes.
Name
Locality Name
Enter the locality name up to 32 bytes.
Organization
Name
(Required)
Enter the organization name up to 32 bytes.
Organization
Unit (Required)
Enter the organization unit up to 32 bytes.
Common Name Enter the common name.
E-mail Address
Upload Signed
Certificate*2
Click to display the Upload Signed Certificate page and to upload the
certificate file to the device from the page.
Password
Enter the password to upload the certificate file.
Re-enter
Password
Enter the password again for confirmation.
File Name
Click Browse to browse the file name to upload to the device.
Import
Click Import to upload the certificate file to the device.
Click to display the Certificate Management page and to manage a
security certification from the page.
Certificate
Management*2
Delete All
Certificates
Category
Select the device to certificate.
Certificate
Purpose
Select the connection to certificate.
Certificate
Order
Select the order to certificate.
Display the List
Click to display the Certificate List page.
Delete
Click to delete all the certificates.
Certificate List*2 Category
176
Enter the e-mail address.
Displays the device to certificate selected at the Certificate
Management page.
Certificate
Purpose
Displays the connection to certificate selected at the Certificate
Management page.
Issued To
Displays the list of certificate order.
Validity
Displays whether certificate is valid or not.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Certificate
Details*2
Certificate
Details
Click to display the Certificate Details page. The SSL/TLS page is
displayed when no item in the Issued To column is selected.
Category
Displays the device to certificate selected at the Certificate
Management page or SSL/TLS page.
Issued To
Displays the device to certificate.
Issuer
Displays the issuer to certificate.
Serial Number
Displays the serial number of the device.
Public Key
Method
Displays the public key method.
Size of Public
Key
Displays the size of public key.
Valid From
Displays the time the certificate is valid.
Valid Until
Displays the time the certificate is invalid.
Status
Displays whether certificate is valid or not.
Certificate
Purpose
Displays the purpose of certificate.
Certificate
Displays the type of device certificate you selected.
Selection Status
Certificate
Signing
Request (CSR)
Details
E-mail Address
Displayed only when an e-mail address is specified in the certificate.
Use this
certificate
Click to apply this certificate to the device.
Delete
Click to delete this certificate.
Export This
Certificate
Click to export the certificate to the other device.
2 Letter Country Displays the details of the Certificate Signing Request (CSR).
Code (Required)
State / Province
Name
Locality Name
Organization
Name
(Required)
Organization
Unit (Required)
Common Name
E-mail Address
*1
*2
This item is available only when the self-signed certificate has been generated.
This item is effective only when connected via SSL/TLS (https). Only the administrator is allowed to display the
pages.
IPsec
Specifies the Security Architecture settings for Internet Protocol (IPsec) for encrypted
communication to the printer.
IPsec Settings
Protocol
Select the check box to enable the protocol.
IKE
Pre-Shared Key is displayed for IKE.
Pre-Shared Key Sets a shared key. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, periods, and
hyphens can be used.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
177
Re-enter
Enters the shared key again to check it.
Pre-Shared Key
IKE SA Lifetime Sets the lifetime for IKE SA from 5 to 28,800 minutes.
IPsec SA
Lifetime
Sets the lifetime for IPsec SA from 5 to 2,880 minutes.
DH Group
Sets the DH group.
PFS
Select the check box to enable the PFS setting.
Remote peers
IPv4 address
Sets the IP address to connect to.
Remote peers
IPv6 address
Sets the IP address to connect to.
Non IPsec
Allows communication with a device which does not support IPsec.
communication
policy
NOTE:
• If IPsec is enabled with incorrect settings, you must disable it using the IPsec menu on the
operator panel.
802.1x
Specifies the settings for IEEE 802.1x authentication for encrypted communication to the
printer.
Configure
802.1x
Enable IEEE
802.1x
Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1x
authentication.
Authentication EAP-MD5
Method
Selects the authentication method to use for IEEE
802.1x authentication.
EAP-MS-CHAPv
PEAP/MS-CHAP
v2
Login Name:
(Device Name)
Sets the login name (device name) for IEEE 802.1x
authentication using up to 128 alphanumeric
characters.
Password
Sets the login password for IEEE 802.1x
authentication using up to 128 alphanumeric
characters.
Re-enter
Password
Confirms the set login password.
NOTE:
• This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
IP Filter
Specifies whether to enable IP filter feature, which allows to make settings of the IP filter
feature used for LPD and Port9100.
IPv4 Filter
Enables or disables IPv4 Filter.
IP Filter Rule List
Add, edit, or delete IP filter rule. Up to 20 rules can be registered.
IPv6 Filter
Enables or disables IPv6 Filter.
IP Filter Rule List
Add, edit, or delete IP filter rule. Up to 20 rules can be registered.
178
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
SMTP Domain Filtering
Specifies whether to limit e-mail destination domains.
NOTE:
• This feature does not restrict sending e-mails through the E-Mail Alert feature.
SMTP Domain
Filtering
Domain
Filtering
Select the check box to enable Domain Filtering.
Allow Domain
List
Allows you to register up to five domains allowed for sending e-mails.
Copy Printer Settings
Copy Printer Settings
The Copy Printer Settings tab includes the Copy Printer Settings and Copy Printer
Settings Report pages.
Copy Printer Settings
Copies the printer settings to the printers of the same configuration model on the same
network environment.
NOTE:
• Printer settings can be simultaneously copied to printers of up to 10 IP addresses.
• You cannot copy the Address Book when the destination printer has a fax job.
1 Enter the IP address and password of the destination printer in the IP Address text
box and Password text box.
2 Click the Copy the settings to the Host in the above list. button.
Copying the settings is complete.
NOTE:
• The connection time-out period is 60 seconds.
3 Check the Copy the settings to the Host in the above list and reboot the printer
menu of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool in the destination printer to verify if
the settings were successfully copied.
NOTE:
• If the destination printer settings are different, the settings of only the same items are copied.
Copy Printer Settings Report
Displays whether the printer setting is successfully copied to the destination printers.
NOTE:
• The history is cleared by turning off the printer.
Print Volume
Print Volume
The Print Volume tab includes the Print Volume and Dell ColorTrack pages.
Print Volume
Displays the number of printed pages. This page can also be displayed by clicking Print
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
179
Volume in the left frame.
Printer Page Count
Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was
shipped from the factory.
Paper Used
Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size.
Dell ColorTrack
Specifies which users have access to color printing and to limit print volume per user.
ColorTrack
Mode
Off
Enables to print the data with no authentication information.
On
Restricts printing based on the print user information registered in the
internal server.
Non Registered
User
Sets whether to permit the printing of data with no authentication
information. To permit the printing for non-account user, select the
check box.
Auto Color To
Mono Print
Sets whether to print all print jobs in black and white even when color
print is specified.
ColorTrack Error
Report
Sets whether to automatically print error-related information if
printing using ColorTrack results in an error.
User
Registration*
Click Edit User Registration to display the Edit Print User
Registration page.
To register a user, click Create to open the Print User Settings page.
To delete a user, click Delete to open the Delete User page.
Clicking Back returns the screen to the status prior to deleting the
user.
To check or change the registered user, click Confirm / Change to
open the Print User Settings page.
User
Registration No.
Displays the user registration number. The Delete User button is
displayed when the user is already registered.
User Name
Sets the user name.
Password
Sets the user password using 4 to 12 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter
password
Enter the password again to check it.
Color Mode
Limitation
Sets whether to limit color printing.
Upper Limit for
Color Print
Sets the maximum number of pages allowed for color printing.
Cumulative
Color Page
Count
Displays the cumulative number of pages printed for color printing.
Upper Limit for
Monochrome
Print
Sets the maximum number of pages allowed for monochrome
printing.
Cumulative
Monochrome
Page Count
Displays the cumulative number of pages printed for monochrome
printing.
This item is displayed only when ColorTrack Mode is On.
180
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Address Book
E-Mail Address
The E-Mail Address tab includes the E-Mail Address, E-Mail Group and Default Setup
pages.
E-Mail Address
Displays the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Address page.
Address List to:
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of user
IDs indicated on the button.
ID
Displays the user ID.
Name
Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no
registration.
Address
Displays the e-mail address of the user.
Delete
Deletes the entry for the selected user ID.
Confirm / Change
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected
user ID.
Create
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected user ID.
E-Mail Address (Confirm/Change, Create)
Displays or edits the e-mail address entries on the E-Mail Address page, or create a new
entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm /
Change or Create on the E-Mail Address top page.
ID
Displays the selected user ID.
Name
Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the
user ID, or enter a name for the new entry.
Address
Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of the user, or enter an
e-mail address for the new entry.
Delete*
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
E-Mail Address (Delete)
Deletes the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Address page. The following
items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the E-Mail Address
top page.
E-Mail Group
Displays the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Group page.
GroupID
Displays the group ID.
Name
Displays the assigned group name. (Not in Use) is displayed when
there is no registration.
Delete
Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.
Confirm / Change
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected
group ID.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
181
Create
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected group ID.
E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)
Displays or edits the e-mail address group entries on the E-Mail Group page, or create a
new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click
Confirm / Change or Create on the E-Mail Group top page.
E-Mail Group
ID
Displays the selected group ID.
Name
Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or
enter a new group name.
Delete*
E-Mail Address
Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs
indicated on the button.
ID
Displays the user ID.
Select the check box on the left to create the group.
Name
Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no
registration.
Address
Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of an entry registered
under the selected user ID, or enter an e-mail address for the new
entry.
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
E-Mail Group (Delete)
Deletes the e-mail group entries registered on the E-Mail Group page. The following
items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the E-Mail Group top
page.
Default Setup
Sets the default e-mail subject and message.
Default Subject
Allows you to enter the default e-mail subject.
Body Text
Allows you to enter the default e-mail message.
Server Address
The Server Address tab includes the Server Address page.
Server Address
Displays the server address entries registered on the Server Address page.
Address List to:
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs
indicated on the button.
ID
Displays the server ID.
Name
Displays the file directory name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there
is no registration.
Server Address
Displays the address of the file directory.
Delete
Deletes the entry for the selected server ID.
Confirm / Change
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected
server ID.
182
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Create
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected server ID.
Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)
Displays or edits the server address entries on the Server Address page, or create a new
entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm /
Change or Create on the Server Address top page.
ID
Displays the selected server ID.
Name
Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server
ID, or enter a new server name.
Server Type
Allows you to view the server type if you click Confirm / Change.
Allows you to edit the server type if you click Create.
FTP*1
SMB
*1
Select this to store scanned data on a server via the FTP protocol.
Select this to store scanned data on a computer via the Server
Message Block (SMB) protocol.
Server Address
Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the
server ID, or enter a new server address.
Share Name*2
Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name, or enter a new
shared name, when Server Type is set to SMB.
Server Path
Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path, or enter a new
path.
Server Port
Number
Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number, or enter a
new port number. If you leave the text box blank, the default port
number (FTP: 21, SMB: 139) is used.
Login Name
Allows you to view or edit the login name that is required to access
the selected protocol, or enter a new login name.
Login Password
Allows you to view or edit the password that is required to access the
selected protocol, or enter a new password.
Re-enter
Password
Confirms the set password.
Delete*3
*1
*2
*3
You can edit this item only when you click Create.
This item is available only when Server Type is set to SMB.
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
Server Address (Delete)
Deletes the server address entries registered on the Server Address page. The following
items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the Server Address
top page.
Phone Book
The Phone Book tab includes the FAX Speed Dial and FAX Group pages.
FAX Speed Dial
Displays the fax number entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page.
Speed Dial List to:
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed
dial codes indicated on the button.
Speed Dial
Displays the speed dial ID.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
183
Name
Displays the assigned name for a speed dial ID.
Phone Number
Displays the speed dial code. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is
no registration.
Delete
Deletes the entry for the selected speed dial code.
Confirm / Change
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected
speed dial code.
Create
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected speed dial code.
FAX Speed Dial (Confirm/Change, Create)
Displays or edits the speed dial entries on the FAX Speed Dial page, or create a new
entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm /
Change or Create on the FAX Speed Dial top page.
Speed Dial
Displays the selected speed dial code.
Name
Allows you to view or edit the name of an entry registered under the
speed dial code, or enter a name for the new entry.
Phone Number
Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under
the speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.
Delete*
Deletes the entry for the speed dial code. This button is available only
on the dialog box for editing an existing entry.
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
FAX Speed Dial (Delete)
Deletes the speed dial entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page. The following
items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the FAX Speed Dial
top page.
FAX Group
Displays the fax group entries registered on the FAX Group page.
ID
Displays a fax group ID.
Name
Displays the assigned group name. (Not in Use) is displayed when
there is no registration.
Delete
Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.
Confirm / Change
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected
group ID.
Create
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected group ID.
FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)
Displays or edits the fax number group entries on the FAX Group page, or create a new
entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm /
Change or Create on the FAX Group top page.
FAX Group
184
ID
Displays the selected group ID.
Name
Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or
enter a new group name.
Delete*
Deletes the current entry.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
FAX Speed Dial
Speed Dial List
to:
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed
dial codes indicated on the button.
Speed Dial
Displays the speed dial code. Select the check box on the left to add
the speed dial code in the group.
Name
Displays the name registered for the speed dial code. (Not in Use) is
displayed when there is no registration.
Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under
the selected speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
FAX Group (Delete)
Deletes the fax number group entries registered on the FAX Group page. The following
items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the FAX Group top
page.
Tray Management
Use the Tray Management menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in tray1
and the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Tray Management
Tray Settings
MPF Mode
Sets whether to use the print driver settings for the size and type of
paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
MPF Paper
Size*1
Sets the size of paper loaded in the MPF.
MPF Paper
Type*1
Sets the type of paper loaded in the MPF.
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
MPF Custom
Paper Size - Y*1
MPF Custom
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
Paper Size - X*1
MPF Display
Tray Prompt*1
Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set
the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the MPF.
Tray 1 Paper
Size
Sets the size of paper loaded in tray1.
Tray 1 Paper
Type
Sets the type of paper loaded in tray1.
Tray 1 Custom
Paper Size - Y
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in tray1.
Tray 1 Custom
Paper Size - X
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in tray1.
Tray 1 Display
Tray Prompt
Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set
the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in tray1.
Tray 2 Paper
Size*2
Sets the size of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Tray 2 Paper
Type*2
Sets the type of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Tray 2 Custom Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet
Paper Size - Y*2 feeder.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
185
Tray 2 Custom Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet
Paper Size - X*2 feeder.
Tray Priority
Tray 2 Display
Tray Prompt*2
Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set
the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the optional
550-sheet feeder.
1st Priority
Sets the paper source to be used as the first priority.
2nd Priority
3rd Priority
*1
*2
*2
Sets the paper source to be used as the second priority.
Sets the paper source to be used as the third priority.
This item is available only when Use Panel Settings in MPF Mode is selected.
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
186
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Print Media Guidelines
This section describes selecting and caring for print media. The printer provides
high-quality printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for
the printer helps to avoid printing troubles.
NOTE:
• Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet print media in the printer.
To help avoiding jam, see "Before Loading."
Supported Print Media
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
Paper Size
A4 (210 × 297 mm)
B5 (182 × 257 mm)
A5 (148 × 210 mm)
B6 (128 × 182 mm)
A6 (105 × 148 mm)
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches)
Folio (8.5 × 13 inches)
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches)
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches)
Statement (5.5 × 8.5 inches)
Envelope #10 (104.8 × 241.3 mm)
Monarch (98.4 × 190.5 mm)
DL (110 × 220 mm)
C5 (162 × 229 mm)
Custom*1:
Width: 76.2 – 215.9 mm (3 – 8.5 inches)
Length: 127 – 355.6 mm (5 – 14 inches)
Print Media Guidelines
187
Paper Type
Plain (Light)
Plain (Normal)
Plain (Thick)
Covers (Thin)*2
Covers (Thick)*2
Rough Surface*2
Coated (Normal)*2
Coated (Thick)*2
Label (Light)*2
Label (Normal)*2
Envelope*2
Recycled
Letterhead*2
Preprinted*2
Prepunched*2
Color
Loading Capacity
*1
*2
50 sheets of the standard paper
XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver does not support custom size paper.
Paper type that does not support printing on the back side of printed paper.
Tray1
Paper Size
A4 (210 × 297 mm)
B5 (182 × 257 mm)
A5 (148 × 210 mm)
B6 (128 × 182 mm)
A6 (105 × 148 mm)
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches)
Folio (8.5 × 13 inches)
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches)
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches)
Statement (5.5 × 8.5 inches)
Envelope #10 (104.8 × 241.3 mm)
Monarch (98.4 × 190.5 mm)
DL (110 × 220 mm)
C5 (162 × 229 mm)
Custom*1:
Width: 76.2 – 215.9 mm (3 – 8.5 inches)
Length: 148 – 355.6 mm (5.8 – 14 inches)
188
Print Media Guidelines
Paper Type
Plain (Light)
Plain (Normal)
Plain (Thick)
Covers (Thin)*2
Covers (Thick)*2
Coated (Normal)*2
Coated (Thick)*2
Labels (Light)*2
Labels (Normal)*2
Envelope*2
Recycled
Letterhead*2
Preprinted*2
Prepunched*2
Color
Loading Capacity
*1
*2
250 sheets of the standard paper
XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver does not support custom size paper.
Paper type that does not support printing on the back side of printed paper.
Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
Paper Size
A4 (210 × 297 mm)
B5 (182 × 257 mm)
A5 (148 × 210 mm)
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches)
Folio (8.5 × 13 inches)
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches)
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches)
Custom*1:
Width: 76.2 – 215.9 mm (3 – 8.5 inches)
Length: 190.5 – 355.6 mm (7.5 – 14 inches)
Paper Type
Plain (Light)
Plain (Normal)
Plain (Thick)
Covers (Thin)*2
Covers (Thick)*2
Coated (Normal)*2
Labels (Light)*2
Labels (Normal)*2
Recycled
Letterhead*2
Preprinted*2
Prepunched*2
Color
Loading Capacity
550 sheets of the standard paper
Print Media Guidelines
189
*1
*2
XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver does not support custom size paper.
Paper type that does not support printing on the back side of printed paper.
NOTE:
• For Plain and Label paper, you can preset the paper density by selecting the Paper Density (Light or
Normal) under Maintenance from the operator panel, Tool Box, or Dell™ Printer Configuration
Web Tool.
Once you set the Paper Density settings, the printer uses the settings for Plain and Label paper.
Supported Paper Weight
Paper type
Weight (g/m2)
Plain
60 – 90
Plain Thick
91 – 105
Recycled
60 – 90
Labels
–
Covers
106 – 176
Covers Thick
177 – 220
Envelope
–
Coated
106 – 176
Coated Thick
177 – 220
Letterhead
60 – 90
Preprinted
60 – 90
Prepunched
60 – 90
Color
60 – 90
Unacceptable Print Media
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as
carbonless paper, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
Pre-printed paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
Pre-printed paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fusing unit
Pre-printed paper that requires a registration (the precise print location on the page)
greater than ±0.09 inch, such as Optical Character Recognition (OCR) forms. In
some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully
print on these forms.
Erasable bond, synthetic paper, and thermal paper
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper
Recycled paper containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that does not meet
DIN 19309
Multiple-part forms or documents
Talc or acid paper that may deteriorate print quality (blank spaces or blotches may
appear in the text)
Recommended Print Media
Proper print media selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
• For the best print quality and feed reliability, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic paper.
190
Print Media Guidelines
•
•
•
For the best print quality in black and white, use 90 g/m2 (24 lb) xerographic, grain
long paper.
Print media designed for general business use also provides acceptable print quality.
Laser printing process heats print media to high temperatures. Only use paper able
to withstand high temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing
hazardous emissions. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether
the paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.
Recommended Pre-Printed Media and Letterheads
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use grain long paper for best results.
Use only forms and letterheads printed using an offset lithographic or engraved
printing process.
Use print media that absorb ink, but does not bleed.
Avoid print media with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use print media printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic
copying machines. The ink must withstand temperatures of 225°C (437°F) without
melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
Use print media printed with inks that are not affected by the resin in the toner or the
silicone in the fusing unit. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based should meet these
requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Recommended Pre-Punched Print Media
•
•
•
•
Use only pre-punched paper made at the paper manufacturer.
Do not drill print media which are already packaged in a ream. Using them may
result in paper jams.
Pre-punched print media can include more paper dust than standard print media.
The printer may require more frequent cleaning, and feed reliability may not be as
good as standard print media.
Weight guidelines for pre-punched print media are the same as non-punched print
media.
Recommended Envelopes
Depending on the envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels of wrinkling.
• Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.
• Use envelopes made from 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) paper. You can use up to 105 g/m2
(28 lb bond) weight for the envelope feeder as long as the cotton content is 25% or
less. Envelopes with 100% cotton content must not exceed 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond)
weight.
• Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without sealing,
excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions. If you are in doubt,
contact your envelope supplier.
• Check for high humidity. High humidity (higher than 60%) and high printing
temperature may seal the envelopes.
• Do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
Print Media Guidelines
191
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
– Contain windows, coated linings, self-stick adhesives, holes, perforations,
cutouts, or embossing
– Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
– Have nicked edges or bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
Recommended Labels
•
•
•
•
•
Label adhesives, face sheet, and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of
205°C (401°F) and pressure of 25 pounds per square inch (psi) without sealing,
excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
Use labels without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous
emissions.
Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.
Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.
Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is
recommended that zone coating of the adhesive is done at least 1 mm (0.04 inch)
away from edges. Otherwise, a jam may occur in the printer, and adhesive material
may contaminate the printer and cartridges.
WARNING:
• Contaminating the printer and cartridges with adhesive could void your printer and cartridge
warranties.
Print Media Storage Guidelines
For proper print media storage, the following guidelines help you to avoid print media
feeding problems and uneven print quality.
• Store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21°C
(70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%.
• Store print media on a flat surface so that the edges do not buckle or curl.
• Print media should be stored on pallets, cartons, shelves, or in cabinets, rather than
directly on the floor.
• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.
192
Print Media Guidelines
Loading Print Media
Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
Before loading any print media, identify the recommended print side of the print media.
This information is usually indicated on the print media package.
Before Loading
The following instructions describe how to avoid paper jams:
• Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in the printer.
• Use only recommended print media. See "Print Media Guidelines."
• Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment. See "Print Media Storage
Guidelines."
• Do not overload the print media sources. Make sure that the print media stack height
does not exceed the maximum height indicated by the load-line labels in the tray.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.
• Flex, fan, and straighten the print media before loading.
• Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed.
• Do not mix different print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media
source.
• Make sure that the recommended print side is facing up when you load the print
media.
• Do not remove the feeding tray during printing.
• Make sure that all cables that connect to the printer are attached correctly.
• Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
• If jams caused by misfeeding paper occur frequently, wipe the retard rollers in the
tray or Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) with a cloth moistened with water.
Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional
550-Sheet Feeder
NOTE:
• To avoid paper jams, do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.
1 For the optional 550-sheet feeder, pull the tray halfway out of the printer.
For Tray1, proceed to step 2.
Loading Print Media
193
2 Hold the tray with both hands, and then remove it from the printer.
3 Adjust the paper guides according to the paper size that you want to load.
NOTE:
• When you load Legal-size paper, extend the tray while pushing the lever located on the front
part of the tray.
194
Loading Print Media
4 Before loading the print media, flex and fan the sheets. Straighten the edges of the
stack on a level surface.
5 Load the print media into the tray with the recommended print side facing up.
NOTE:
• Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray. Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams.
• When loading coated paper, load one sheet at a time.
• When loading letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper, see "Loading Letterhead,
Pre-Printed, and Pre-Punched Paper."
6 Make sure that paper guides rest lightly against the edge of the print media stack.
NOTE:
• Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
NOTE:
• When loading user-specified print media, adjust the width guides and slide the extendable
part of the tray by pinching the length guide and sliding it until it rests lightly against the edge
of the paper.
7 Insert the tray into the printer and push until it stops.
Loading Print Media
195
NOTE:
• If the front side of the tray is extended, the tray protrudes when it is inserted into the printer.
8 When the Tray Configuration screen appears, tap Size.
The following shows the Tray1 screen as an example.
NOTE:
• Set the same paper size and type as the actual paper being loaded. An error may occur if the
paper size or type setting is different from the loaded paper.
9 Select
or
paper size.
until the desired paper size appears, and then select the desired
10 Tap Type.
11 Select
or
paper type.
196
until the desired paper type appears, and then select the desired
Loading Print Media
12 Tap OK.
Loading Envelopes in the Tray1
NOTE:
• Use only recommended envelopes. See "Recommended Envelopes."
The following guidelines describe how to load envelopes.
• Use only freshly unpackaged and undamaged envelopes.
If you do not load envelopes in the tray right after they have been removed from the
package, they may bulge. To avoid jams, press firmly across the whole envelopes to
flatten them as shown in the illustration before loading the envelopes in the tray.
Feed direction
•
•
•
•
Use only same size envelopes for a single print job.
The maximum height (quantity) of envelopes that can be loaded in the tray is
approximately 27.5 mm (1.08 inch) (20 envelopes).
When printing on envelopes, set the print media source to the tray. From the print
driver, select Envelope for the paper type, and then select the correct size of the
envelope.
Adjust the paper guides accordingly after envelopes are loaded.
Envelope #10, Monarch, or DL
Load the envelopes with the flaps closed and the print side facing up. Make sure that the
flaps are on the left side when you face towards the printer.
C5
When loading envelopes with the flaps open, load the envelopes so that the print side
Loading Print Media
197
faces up and the bottom edge (the edge with no flaps) enters the printer first.
When loading envelopes with the flaps closed, load the envelopes so that the print side
faces up and the top edge (the edge with flaps) enters the printer first.
Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
NOTE:
• Do not add or remove print media when there is still print media in the MPF or when the printer is
printing from the MPF. This may result in a paper jam.
• Do not place objects on the MPF.
• Do not apply excessive force on the MPF or press it down.
• If a jam occurs with print media, feed one sheet at a time through the MPF.
• The label on the MPF shows how to load the MPF with paper, and how to turn an envelope for
printing.
1 Gently pull and open the MPF cover.
NOTE:
• Extend the extension tray as necessary.
198
Loading Print Media
2 Slide the width guides according to the paper size that you want to load.
3 Insert all print media facing up and top edge first into the MPF.
NOTE:
• Do not force the print media into the MPF.
• When loading coated paper, load one sheet at a time.
• When loading letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper, see "Loading Letterhead,
Pre-Printed, and Pre-Punched Paper."
4 Make sure that both width guides rest lightly against the edge of the print media
stack.
NOTE:
• Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
Loading Print Media
199
5 When the MPF Configuration screen appears, tap Size.
6 Tap
or
until the desired paper size appears, and then select the size.
7 Tap Type.
8 Tap
or
until the desired paper type appears, and then select the type.
9 Tap OK.
Loading Envelopes in the MPF
NOTE:
• Use only recommended envelopes. See "Recommended Envelopes."
The following guidelines describe how to load envelopes.
• Use only freshly unpackaged and undamaged envelopes.
If you do not load envelopes in the MPF right after they have been removed from the
package, they may bulge. To avoid jams, press firmly across the whole envelopes to
flatten them as shown in the illustration before loading the envelopes in the MPF.
Feed direction
•
•
•
•
200
Use only same size envelopes for a single print job.
The maximum height (quantity) of envelopes that can be loaded in the MPF is
approximately 5 mm (0.19 inch) (5 envelopes).
When printing on envelopes, set the print media source to the MPF. From the print
driver, select Envelope for the paper type, and then select the correct size of the
envelope.
Adjust the width guides accordingly after envelopes are loaded.
Loading Print Media
Envelope #10, Monarch, or DL
Load the envelopes with the flaps closed and the print side facing up. Make sure that the
flaps are on the left side when you face towards the printer.
C5
When loading envelopes with the flaps open, load the envelopes with the print side
facing up and the bottom edge first into the MPF.
When loading envelopes with the flaps closed, load the envelopes with the print side
facing up and the top edge first into the MPF.
Loading Labels in the MPF
NOTE:
• Use only recommended labels. See "Recommended Labels."
The following guidelines describe how to load labels:
• Do not load labels in the MPF together with other types of paper.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing,
resulting in a jam.
• Set the paper type to Label from the print driver.
Loading Print Media
201
•
•
•
•
Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.
Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inch) of the die-cut.
Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inch) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or
between die-cuts of the label.
Do not print a label through the printer more than once.
Loading Letterhead, Pre-Printed, and Pre-Punched
Paper
Letterhead, pre-printed, and pre-punched paper must be inserted bottom edge first with
the print side facing down as shown in the following illustration.
NOTE:
• Make sure that Letterhead 2 Sided or Letterhead Duplex Mode is set to Enable, and Type
is set to Letterhead, Preprinted, or Prepunched on the operator panel even when printing on
a single side. You can also set the same setting using the print driver.
For Tray1 and optional 550-sheet feeder:
• Face up
• Letterhead enters the printer first.
AD
HE
ER
TT
LE
For MPF:
• Face up
• Letterhead enters the printer first.
EA
ER
LET
Linking Trays
The printer links the trays when you load the same size and type of print media in them.
The first tray is utilized until the print media runs out after which the next tray is used.
NOTE:
• The print media should be the same size and type in each tray.
The Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) cannot be linked to any of the tray sources.
After loading the selected trays with the same size and type of print media, select the
202
Loading Print Media
Paper Type setting in the Tray Settings component for each tray.
To disable tray linking, change the paper type for one of the trays to a unique value.
NOTE:
• If different types of print media of the same size are loaded in the trays, the printer links them if the
paper type is not specified in the print driver properties/preferences.
Loading Print Media
203
Loading Documents
You can use the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) or the document glass to
load a document. Using the DADF, you can load up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper
at a time. Using the document glass, you can load one sheet at a time.
NOTE:
• To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use the document glass
instead of the DADF.
Before Loading Documents in the DADF
The following instructions describe how to avoid paper jams:
• Do not use document smaller than 139.7 mm by 139.7 mm (5.5 inches by 5.5 inches)
and larger than 215.9 mm by 355.6 mm (8.5 inches by 14 inches)
• Do not use booklets, pamphlets, photographs, transparencies, and documents
having other unusual characteristics.
• Do not use carbon or carbon-backed paper, coated paper, onion skin or thin paper,
wrinkled or creased paper, curled or rolled paper, and torn paper.
• Do not use documents with staples or paper clips.
• Do not use documents exposed to adhesives or solvent based materials such as
glue, ink and correcting fluid.
• Do not use document that you have cut or trimmed.
• Do not use wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled document.
• Do not mix different sizes, weights, or types of document in the DADF.
• Flex, fan, and straighten document before you load it.
• Do not overload the DADF. Make sure that the document stack height does not
exceed the maximum height indicated by the load-line labels in the DADF.
• If jams caused by misfeeding paper occur frequently, wipe the DADF feed rollers
with a cloth moistened with water.
Loading a Document in the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF)
1 Adjust the document guides according to the document size that you want to load,
and place the document(s) facing up with the top edge of the document(s) first into
the DADF.
204
Loading Documents
NOTE:
• Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
• Before loading the document(s) on the DADF, straighten the edges of the stack of the
document(s).
• Use the document stopper when copying a legal-size document.
Loading a Document on the Document Glass
NOTE:
• Make sure that no document is in the DADF. If any document is detected in the DADF, it takes
priority over the document on the document glass.
1 Open the document cover.
2 Place the document facing down on the document glass and align it with the
registration guide on the top left corner of the glass.
Loading Documents
205
3 Close the document cover.
NOTE:
• Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and increase the
toner consumption.
• If you are copying/scanning/faxing a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until its
hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker
than 30 mm, start copying/scanning/faxing with the cover open.
206
Loading Documents
4
Printing, Copying, Scanning,
Faxing, and Dell Document Hub
Printing
208
Copying
217
Scanning
220
Faxing
245
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows® Only)
262
207
Printing
This chapter covers tips for printing, how to print certain information from the printer,
and how to cancel a job.
NOTE:
• Selecting the appropriate print media and loading them properly into the paper tray is key to
producing good quality prints and reducing paper jams. See "Print Media Guidelines" and "Loading
Print Media."
Sending a Job to Print
NOTE:
• Print settings made from the print driver have precedence over the menu settings made from the
operator panel or Tool Box.
• If you are not familiar with a feature in the print driver window, open the online Help for more
information.
The following procedure uses a typical Windows® and OS X program as an example.
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the File menu, select Print.
3 Check that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box, and then check and
change the print settings in the dialog box.
4 For Windows®, click Preferences, adjust print settings that are not available in the
dialog box, and then click OK.
For OS X, proceed to step 5.
5 Click Print.
NOTE:
• You can switch the paper size loaded in the tray between A4 and letter. Also, you can switch the
paper size between A5 and statement. When you want to switch the page size, load the print media
of the selected size.
See "A4<>Letter Switch" and "A5<>Statement Switch."
Canceling a Print Job
You can cancel a job using the operator panel or a computer.
Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel
Canceling a Job While Print Is in Progress
Tap Stop.
The print job in progress is canceled.
NOTE:
• All the following jobs are not canceled.
Canceling a Job Before Printing Starts
1 Press the
(Job Status) button.
2 Tap the job you want to cancel.
208
Printing
3 Tap Stop
Stop Job.
Canceling a Job From a Computer
Canceling a Job From the Taskbar (Windows® Only)
When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the bottom right corner of
the taskbar.
1 Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2 Select the job you want to cancel.
3 Press  on the keyboard.
Canceling a Job From the Dock (OS X Only)
When you send a job to print, the printer icon appears in the Dock.
The following procedure uses OS X 10.10 as an example.
1 Click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2 Click the delete job button on the right.
Duplex Printing
The duplex printing feature allows you to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
NOTE:
• The duplex printing feature does not support thick cover paper, thick coated paper, labels, and
envelopes.
Using Duplex Print
For Windows®:
The following procedure uses a typical Windows® program on Windows® 7/Windows®
10 as an example.
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 Open the print dialog box from the program.
3 Select the print driver, and then click Preferences.
4 In the Paper Source drop-down list box, select a paper tray.
5 In the Duplex drop-down list box, select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge.
NOTE:
• For details about the Flip on Short Edge and Flip on Long Edge options, see "Flip on Short
Edge" and "Flip on Long Edge."
6 Click OK.
7 Click OK or Print.
Printing
209
For OS X:
The following procedure uses TextEdit on OS X 10.10 as an example.
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 Open the print dialog box from the program.
3 In the TextEdit drop-down list box, click Printer Features.
4 In the Feature Sets drop-down list box, click Paper Handling.
5 In the Duplex drop-down list box, select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge.
6 Click Print.
Using Booklet Print
The booklet print feature prints a document as a booklet. The pages are arranged in the
correct order when the printout is collated or stapled.
NOTE:
• When the XML Paper Specification (XPS) or PostScript (PS) driver is used, booklet print is not
available.
• You must select Flip on Long Edge in the Duplex when using the Booklet Print feature.
Flip on Long Edge
Assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation). The
following illustration shows long-edge binding for portrait and
landscape pages:
Portrait
210
Printing
Landscape
Flip on Short Edge
Assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation). The
following illustration shows short-edge binding for portrait and
landscape pages:
Portrait
Landscape
Using Stored Print
When you send a job to the printer, you can specify in the print driver to store the job in
the memory. When you are ready to print the job, go to the printer and use the operator
panel to identify which job in the memory you want to print.
NOTE:
• The data in the memory is cleared when the printer is turned off.
• The Stored Print feature is available when:
- The RAM disk is enabled in the printer menu.
- RAM Disk is set to Available in the print driver.
Overview
The Stored Print feature includes the following job types.
Read each description to select optimum job type for your print job.
If you want to print confidential documents, see "Secure Print" and "Private Mail Box
Print."
If you want to store the print job in the printer for re-printing, see "Private Mail Box Print"
and "Public Mail Box Print."
If you want to prevent large number of misprinted copies, see "Proof Print."
Secure Print
You can temporarily store print jobs secured with a password in the memory. Users with
the password can print them from the operator panel. This feature can be used to print
confidential documents. A stored print job is deleted after you print it or at a designated
time.
Printing
211
Send confidential
data.
Enter the password
from the operator
panel.
Print data.
Confidential
Data is deleted at a
designated time.
Private Mail Box Print
You can store print jobs in the printer for re-printing with a password. The stored jobs
remain in the printer until you delete them from the operator panel. Only users with the
password can print them from the operator panel. This feature can be used to print
confidential documents.
Send data.
Enter the password
from the operator
panel.
Print data.
Public Mail Box Print
You can store print jobs in the printer for re-printing without a password. The stored jobs
remain in the printer until you delete them from the operator panel. Any user can print
them from the operator panel.
Print data.
Send data.
Proof Print
The collated print job is stored in the memory, but a single copy is printed so you can
check the print result. If you do not have problems with the print result, you can choose
to print more copies. This prevents large number of misprinted copies.
212
Printing
One set is
printed.
Send data.
Print the rest of sets from
the operator panel.
Check if the print
result is OK.
Procedures for Printing Stored Print
NOTE:
• The Stored Print feature is not available when a print job is too large for the available memory.
• The Stored Print feature is available when using the Printer Control Language (PCL) or PostScript
(PS) driver.
Storing Print Jobs With the Print Driver
To use the Stored Print feature, you need to select Secure Print, Proof Print, Private
Mailbox, or Public Mailbox from Job Type in the General tab of the print driver. The job
is stored in the memory until you request to print it from the operator panel.
NOTE:
• You must specify a password for the Secure Print and Private Mail Box Print jobs.
• If a document name is not assigned to your print job in the print driver, the job's name is identified
using the printer's time and date of submission to distinguish it from other jobs you have stored
under your name.
Printing the Stored Jobs From the Operator Panel
1 Press the
(Home) button.
Print.
2 Tap
3 Select a job type.
If the desired job type is not displayed, swipe the screen.
4 Select the desired user ID.
If the desired document is not displayed, tap
or
to scroll through the screen.
If you have selected Secure Print or Private Mailbox in step 3, enter the
password using the number pad, and then tap OK.
NOTE:
• If you enter an invalid password, the message Incorrect password Try again. appears.
Tap Close to return to the screen for entering the password.
5 Select the desired document.
If the desired document is not displayed, tap
or
to scroll through the screen.
To specify the number of copies, tap Quantity.
NOTE:
• For Secure Print, Quantity is not available.
6 For Secure Print, tap Print and Delete.
Printing
213
For Private Mailbox Print, tap Print.
NOTE:
• For Secure Print, the data in the memory is deleted after printing.
• For Private Mailbox Print, you can delete the data in the memory after printing if you select the
Print and Delete check box.
7 Tap OK.
The stored job will be printed.
Deleting Stored Jobs
With Secure Print, a job that has been stored is deleted after printing or deleted at a
designated time entered on the operator panel.
For other jobs, these jobs remain stored until you delete them from the operator panel.
To delete the stored jobs:
1 Press the
(Home) button.
Print.
2 Tap
3 Select a job type.
If the desired job type is not displayed, swipe the screen.
4 Select the desired user ID.
If the desired document is not displayed, tap
or
to scroll through the screen.
If you have selected Secure Print or Private Mailbox in step 3, enter the
password using the number pad, and then tap OK.
NOTE:
• If you enter an invalid password, the message Incorrect password Try again. appears.
Tap Close to return to the screen for entering the password.
5 Select the desired document.
If the desired document is not displayed, tap
or
to scroll through the screen.
6 Tap Delete.
Printing From USB Flash Drive
The USB Direct Print feature allows you to print files stored in a USB flash drive without
using a computer.
CAUTION:
• To prevent damage to the printer, do not connect any device other than a USB flash drive to the
front USB port of the printer.
• Do not remove the USB flash drive from the front USB port until the printer has finished printing.
NOTE:
• If the Functions Control setting is set to On (Password), you need to enter the four-digit
password to use the function. If the Functions Control setting is set to Off, the function is disabled
and the menu is not displayed on the screen. See "Functions Control."
Supported USB Flash Drive
For the front USB port of the printer, you can use a USB flash drive with the following
specification:
214
Printing
•
•
•
•
USB 2.0 and 1.1
Type A connector
Metal shielded
FAT16, FAT32, or VFAT file system
NOTE:
• If the USB flash drive is formatted in a file system other than the above, the printer may not detect
the USB flash drive.
• A USB flash drive with authentication feature and some brands of USB flash drive cannot be used
with this printer.
Supported File Formats
Files in the following file formats can be printed directly from a USB flash drive:
• PDF
• TIFF
• JPEG
Printing a PDF/TIFF or JPEG File in a USB Flash Drive
1 Press the
(Home) button.
2 Insert a USB flash drive to the front USB port of the printer.
3 Tap Print PDF/TIFF or Print JPEG.
4 Select the desired file.
If the desired file is not displayed, swipe the screen or tap folders.
NOTE:
• Only the following characters are displayed on the touch panel:
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $ % ’ ‘ - @ {} ~ ! # ( ) & _ ^
• Up to 10 PDF/TIFF or 100 JPEG files can be selected and printed in display order.
5 Tap
, and then check and change the print settings.
See "Print Settings."
Printing
215
6 Tap Print.
CAUTION:
• Do not remove the USB flash drive while the printer is accessing the drive.
The data in the drive may be destroyed, or the drive itself may be damaged and become
unusable.
NOTE:
• Color printing is secured with a password if the Functions Control setting for USB Direct
Print is set to On(Color Password). If you set Output Color to Full Color and the
Functions Control setting for USB Direct Print to On(Color Password), you are
required to enter the four-digit password.
• Only PDF/TIFF or JPEG files created using the scan function of the printer can be printed
through the USB Direct Print feature.
7 Remove the USB flash drive from the printer.
CAUTION:
• Make sure that the printer is not accessing the USB flash drive.
Printer Settings
You can change most of the print settings from the program you are printing from.
Settings from the program update the default system settings for the printer. Settings
from the print driver only apply to the job that you are currently sending to the printer.
If you cannot change a setting from the program, use the operator panel, Tool Box on
the Dell Printer Hub/Dell Print Management Tool, or the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool. Changing a system setting from the operator panel, Tool Box, or Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool makes that setting the user default.
You can verify the detailed system settings by printing a system settings report. For
details about how to print a system settings report, see "Report / List."
You can reset settings to their default values from the operator panel.
See "Resetting Defaults."
To specify your own default settings:
1 Press the
(Information) button.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
2 Tap the Tools tab
Admin Settings.
3 Tap PCL, PS, or PDF.
4 Select the desired menu item.
If the desired menu item is not displayed, tap
or
to scroll through the screen.
5 Select the desired setting or enter the value, and then tap OK.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed.
216
Printing
Copying
NOTE:
• If the Functions Control setting is set to On (Password), you need to enter the four-digit
password to use the function. If the Functions Control setting is set to Off, the function is disabled
and the menu is not displayed on the screen. See "Functions Control."
Making Copies From the Document Glass
NOTE:
• A computer connection is not required for copying.
• Remove any documents from the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) before copying
from the document glass.
• Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy output. For best results,
clean the document glass before use. See "Cleaning the Scanner."
1 Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and then close the
document cover.
See "Loading Documents."
2 Press the
(Home) button.
Copy.
3 Tap
4 Check and change the copy settings.
See "Copy."
5 In Quantity, tap – or + to specify the number of copies.
6 Tap Copy.
NOTE:
• To cancel a copy job, tap Stop at any time while scanning a document.
Making Copies From the DADF
CAUTION:
• Do not load more than 50 sheets into the DADF or allow more than 50 sheets to be fed to the
document output tray. The document output tray should be emptied before it exceeds 50
sheets or your documents may be damaged.
NOTE:
• A computer connection is not required for copying.
1 Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2 Press the
3 Tap
(Home) button.
Copy.
4 Check and change the copy settings.
See "Copy."
5 In Quantity, tap – or + to specify the number of copies.
Copying
217
6 Tap Copy.
NOTE:
• To cancel a copy job, tap Stop at any time while scanning a document.
Using the ID Copy
NOTE:
• If the Functions Control setting is set to Disable, the function is disabled and the menu is not
displayed on the screen. See "Functions Control."
You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side of a single sheet of paper in its
original size by tapping ID Copy on the touch panel. This feature helps to show both
sides of an ID card in one page in its original size.
1 Place an ID card facing down on the document glass, and then close the document
cover.
See "Loading Documents."
2 Press the
(Home) button.
ID Copy.
3 Tap
4 Check and change the copy settings.
See "Copy."
5 In Quantity, tap – or + to specify the number of copies.
6 Tap Copy.
NOTE:
• Color copy is secured with a password if the Functions Control setting for Copy is set to
On(Color Password). If you set Output Color to Full Color and the Functions Control
setting for Copy to On(Color Password), you are required to enter the four-digit password.
After the front side of the ID card is scanned, the screen prompts you to turn over
the card.
To copy the back side:
a Turn the ID card over.
b Tap Continue.
To copy only one side:
a Tap Print Now.
Changing the Default Copy Settings
The default settings of the copy menu options such as Output Color, Select Tray,
and Darken/Lighten can be set to the most frequently used modes. When you copy a
document, the specified default settings are used unless they are changed using the
operator panel.
The settings on Default Settings will be reflected when you create a new tile. If you
change the settings on Default Settings after creating the new tile, it does not affect
the settings of the tile you created earlier. See "Adding a New Tile."
NOTE:
• You can set the same setting using the Tool Box on the Dell Printer Hub/Dell Print Management
Tool or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See the help on the Tool Box or "Dell™ Printer
Configuration Web Tool."
218
Copying
To specify your own default settings:
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab
Default Settings
3 Select the desired menu item.
If the desired menu item is not displayed, tap
Copy Defaults.
or
to scroll through the screen.
4 Select the desired setting or enter the value, and then tap OK.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed.
Copying
219
Scanning
NOTE:
• If the Functions Control setting is set to On (Password), you need to enter the four-digit
password to use the function. If the Functions Control setting is set to Off, the function is disabled
and the menu is not displayed on the screen. See "Functions Control."
Scanning Overview
The printer provides several ways to scan your document. There are two main scanning
types. One is operated on the printer side without using the scanner driver, and the other
is operated on the computer side using a software and the scanner driver.
The following illustration shows overview for each scanning type.
Computer/
Mobile Device
Operate from the Printer
"Scanning to a Computer With a USB Connection”
“Scanning to a Computer With a Network Connection"
Operate from the Computer/Mobile Device
"Scanning From a Computer Using Web Services on Devices (WSD)"
“Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver"
"Scanning Using the Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver”
"Scanning Using Wi-Fi Direct"
Scan
FTP Server/
Shared Folder
"Scanning to a Computer or Server With SMB/FTP"
E-mail
"Sending a Scanned Data via E-Mail"
USB
"Scanning to a USB Flash Drive"
The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item type and how
you plan to use the image or document after you scan it to your computer. For the best
results, use these recommended settings.
Type
Resolution
Documents
300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi grayscale or
color
Documents of poor quality or that contain small text 400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi grayscale
Photographs and pictures
100–200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale
Images for an inkjet printer
150–300 dpi
Images for a high-resolution printer
300–600 dpi
Scanning above the recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the
220
Scanning
program. To scan above the recommended resolutions, preview (or pre-scan) and crop
the image to reduce the size before scanning the image.
Tips for Easy Network Scanning
•
•
The network scanning with the Scan to Computer feature is recommended if you
are not familiar with the network scanning setup. It provides the simple and easy
steps for your convenience. For details, see "Scanning to a Computer With a
Network Connection."
Before using the Scan to Network Folder feature, configure the network connection
details using the Address Book Editor if you are not familiar with the setup using the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
The Address Book Editor helps to register the scanning destination details to the
printer.
Scanning to a Computer With a USB Connection
You can send scanned data from the operator panel to a computer connected via USB
cable. The scanned data is saved in the Documents folder for Windows® or on the
desktop for OS X by default. To change the location to save, see "Changing the Location
to Save the Scanned Data."
NOTE:
• You must connect your computer via USB for selecting the Scan to Computer feature from the
operator panel. Network connection is not supported.
• This feature is supported on both Windows® and OS X.
1 Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2 Press the
3 Tap
(Home) button.
Scan to Computer.
4 Select a computer.
If the desired computer is not displayed, swipe the screen.
5 Check and change the scan settings.
See "Scan to Computer."
6 Tap Scan.
Scanning to a Computer With a Network Connection
If the printer is connected to a computer via the Scan to Computer network using Web
Services on Devices (WSD), you can send scanned data to a computer.
NOTE:
• You need to setup connection using Web Services on Devices (WSD).
• Web Services on Devices (WSD) is supported only on Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8,
Windows® 8.1, and Windows® 10.
Printer Setup for Scan to Web Services on Devices (WSD)
Setup the printer and computer for connection using Web Services on Devices (WSD).
Scanning
221
Checking the Printer Setting
To use this scanning method, make sure that the Web Services on Devices (WSD) is
enabled from the operator panel of the printer or on the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool. See "Port Settings" or "Protocols."
Setting Up the Computer
NOTE:
• For Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1, and Windows® 10, the computer automatically connects the
printer using Web Services on Devices (WSD). There is no need to install the printer manually.
The following procedure uses Windows® 7 as an example.
1 Click Start Computer Network.
2 Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click Install.
The printer is connected using Web Services on Devices (WSD).
3 Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click Scan profiles.
4 Specify the various settings of the profile, including the Source where the
documents are loaded.
Scanning and Sending Images to the Computer
1 Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2 Press the
(Home) button.
Scan to Computer.
3 Tap
NOTE:
• Whether to scan from the DADF or from the document glass can be specified in the scan
profile. Make sure to specify the scan profile accordingly if you want to scan the document
from the DADF.
4 Select a computer.
If the desired computer is not displayed, swipe the screen.
5 Specify the type of scan.
If the desired type is not displayed, swipe the screen.
For details about the type of scan, see "Scan to Computer."
222
Scanning
6 Tap Scan.
Changing the Location to Save the Scanned Data
Use Dell Printer Hub (Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw) or Dell Print Management Tool
(Dell S2825cdn) to change the output destination of the obtained image files and to
select whether to open the image files using the related program.
NOTE:
• Dell Printer Hub and Dell Print Management Tool are supported on only Windows® 7 or later.
To open Dell Printer Hub:
The following procedure uses Windows® 7, Windows® 10, and OS X 10.10 as examples.
For Windows® 7:
Click Start All Programs
For Windows® 10:
Click the Start button
Dell Printers
Dell Printer Hub.
Dell Printer Hub.
For OS X 10.10:
Click Finder Applications Dell Dell Color Cloud Multifunction Printer H625cdw/Dell Color Cloud Multifunction Printer - H825cdw/Dell Color Smart
Multifunction Printer - S2825cdn, and then double-click ScanButton Manager.
Scanning From a Computer Using Web Services on
Devices (WSD)
If the printer is connected to a computer via network using Web Services on Devices
Scanning
223
(WSD), you can scan documents from the computer.
NOTE:
• To scan from the computer using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you need to setup connection
using Web Services on Devices (WSD).
• Web Services on Devices (WSD) is supported only on Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8,
Windows® 8.1, and Windows® 10.
Preparations for Scanning From the Computer
The same preparations are necessary as in using the Scan to Computer feature. See
"Scanning to a Computer With a Network Connection."
Scanning From the Computer
The following procedure uses Windows® 7 and Windows® 10 as example.
1 Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2 Click Start Devices and Printers.
For Windows® 10: Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel
Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers.
3 Right-click the printer, and then select Start scan.
4 Specify the necessary settings for scanning, and then click Scan.
NOTE:
• When you use Windows Vista®, use the drawing software such as Microsoft® Photo Gallery,
select the printer connected using the Web Services on Devices (WSD), and start scanning.
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver
With the TWAIN driver, you can import scanned images to a software such as Adobe®
Photoshop®.
NOTE:
• Both USB and Network connections are supported.
• This feature is supported on Windows® and Mac OS X 10.7 or later.
• To check and set the IP address of the printer, or set the password for Functions Control feature
when PC Scan is set to On (Password). For details, see "Managing the Scanner."
The following procedure uses typical program that supports TWAIN as an example.
1 Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2 Start the graphic software that supports TWAIN, such as Adobe® Photoshop®.
3 Select the scanner from the TWAIN menu on the graphic software, specify the
necessary settings, and then start scanning on the window such as shown below.
For details on operating the graphic software, see the manuals of your software.
For Windows®:
224
Scanning
For OS X:
NOTE:
• The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.
Scanning Using the Windows® Image Acquisition
(WIA) Driver
Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) is one of the standard components provided by
Windows® XP and later operating systems and works with digital cameras and scanners.
Unlike the TWAIN driver, the Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) driver allows you to scan
an image and easily manipulate those images without using additional software.
With the Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) driver, you can import scanned images to
Microsoft® programs such as Windows® Photo Gallery and Microsoft® Paint.
NOTE:
• Both USB and Network connections including Web Services on Devices (WSD) are supported.
• The Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) driver is supported only on Windows® computers.
• To check and set the IP address of the printer, or set the password for Functions Control feature
when PC Scan is set to On (Password). For details, see "Managing the Scanner."
Scanning
225
Scanning an Image From the Drawing Software
The following procedure uses Windows® 7 as an example.
1 Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2 Start the drawing software, such as Microsoft® Paint for Windows®.
NOTE:
• When using Windows Vista® or Windows Server® 2008, use Windows® Photo Gallery instead
of Microsoft® Paint.
• When using programs that utilize Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) 2.0, such as Windows®
Fax and Scan on Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1, and Windows® 10,
the Feeder (Scan both sides) option can be selected for duplex scanning.
3 Click the Paint button From scanner or camera.
The following image uses Dell H825cdw as an example.
NOTE:
• The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.
4 Select your desired type of picture, and then click Adjust the quality of the scanned
picture.
The Advanced Properties dialog box appears.
5 Click the desired properties
6 Click Scan
OK.
Save.
Scanning Using Wi-Fi Direct
This section provides information for Wi-Fi Direct scanning. Wi-Fi Direct allows your
mobile devices such as computers, smartphones, and tablets, to connect to the printer
directly via a Wi-Fi network. With Wi-Fi Direct, you can scan documents from your
mobile devices directly without an access point or a wireless router.
226
Scanning
To setup and connect using Wi-Fi Direct, See ”Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct.”
NOTE:
•
•
•
•
Wi-Fi Direct is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
The maximum number of mobile devices that can be connected via the Wi-Fi Direct network is 3.
You cannot connect your mobile device to the Internet via the printer’s Wi-Fi Direct network.
Depending on the mobile device, the channel used to connect the mobile device to the printer via
Wi-Fi Direct may differ from the channel used by the printer to connect to a network via Wi-Fi
infrastructure mode. In such a case, simultaneous connection with Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi
infrastructure mode may not work properly.
• The printer connected with Wi-Fi Direct supports the following protocols;
LPD, Port9100, WSD*, Bonjour (mDNS), SNMPv1/v2c, Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, TWAIN,
WIA, ICA.
WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
Scanning via Wi-Fi Direct
The scanning procedure varies depending on the mobile device and the application you
are using. Refer to the manual supplied with your mobile device or application to scan.
Scanning to a Computer or Server With SMB/FTP
You can scan and send the scanned data to a shared folder on a computer or an FTP
server.
NOTE:
• This feature does not require a network scanner driver.
Overview
The Scan to Network Folder feature allows you to send the scanned data to a computer
or FTP server.
Computer
FTP Server
Scan
Using FTP
Using SMB
Computer
Required Operating Systems:
For FTP:
NOTE:
• For details about how to configure the FTP service, refer to the manual supplied with the software.
• Windows Vista® supports IPv4 only.
Scanning
227
•
Windows®
Windows Server®
FTP service of Microsoft® Internet Information Services
•
Mac OS X 10.7 or later operating systems
FTP service of Mac OS X
For SMB:
This feature is supported on Windows Server® 2008 or later and Mac OS X 10.7 or later.
Overview for Scanning to an FTP Server
The following is a typical setup flow for sending scanned data to an FTP server:
1 Set SMB/FTP Destination into the Address Book.
See "Setting SMB/FTP Destination Into the Address Book."
2 Send the scanned data on the network.
See "Sending the Scanned Data on the Network."
Overview for Scanning to a Shared Folder Using SMB
NOTE:
• The setup for Scan to Network Folder via SMB can be configured easily with the bundled Address
Book Editor utility.
For details about Address Book Editor, see "Using Address Book Editor."
• Scan to Network Folder can be also accomplished with the Web Services on Devices (WSD)
function.
For details about scanning using the Web Services on Devices (WSD) function, see "Scanning to a
Computer With a Network Connection" and "Scanning From a Computer Using Web Services on
Devices (WSD)."
The following is a typical setup flow for sending scanned data to a shared folder using
SMB:
1 Set a user account.
See "Setting a User Account (SMB Only)."
2 Create a shared folder.
See "Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)."
3 Set SMB/FTP Destination into the Address Book.
See "Setting SMB/FTP Destination Into the Address Book."
4 Send the scanned data on the network.
See "Sending the Scanned Data on the Network."
Setting a User Account (SMB Only)
To send scanned data to a SMB shared folder, it is necessary to have a shared folder on a
computer. To create a shared folder, a user account with a valid password is required.
For Windows®:
228
Scanning
If the user account you are going to use does not have a login password, set a password
with the following procedure.
After checking the login user name and password of the user account, proceed to
"Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)."
The following procedure uses Windows® 7, Windows® 10, and OS X 10.10 as examples.
For Windows® 7:
1 Click Start Control Panel User Accounts and Family Safety
Create a password for your account.
User Accounts
2 Add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows® 10:
1 Right-click the Start button, and then click Settings.
2 Click Accounts
Sign-in options
Add under Password.
3 Add in a password for your user login account.
For OS X 10.10:
1 Click System Preferences
Users & Groups
Change Password.
2 Enter a password for your user login account in New password.
3 Re-enter the password in Verify.
Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)
Create a shared folder to store the scanned data from the printer.
The following procedure uses Windows® 7, Windows® 10, and OS X 10.10 as examples.
For Windows® 7 and Windows® 10:
1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer.
MyShare is used as an example folder name in this procedure.
2 Right-click on the folder, and then click Properties.
The Properties dialog box appears.
3 Click the Sharing tab
Advanced Sharing.
Scanning
229
4 Select the Share this folder check box.
5 Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
NOTE:
• Write down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.
6 Click Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.
7 Click Add.
8 Search user login name by performing either of the following:
• Click Advanced, and then search user login name.
• Enter the user login name in the Enter the object names to select text box, and
then click Check Names.
Myself is used as an example login name in the following illustration.
9 Click OK.
230
Scanning
10 Click the user login name that you have just entered, and then select the Full
Control check box.
This permits the document to be sent into this folder.
NOTE:
• Do not use Everyone as the user login name.
11 Click OK.
NOTE:
• To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
For example:
Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.
When you are finished creating a shared folder, proceed to "Setting SMB/FTP Destination
Into the Address Book."
For OS X 10.10:
1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer.
MyShare is used as an example folder name.
2 Click the created folder
File
Get Info.
3 Select the Shared folder check box.
4 Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing.
5 Select the File Sharing check box, and then click Options.
6 Select the Share Files and folders using SMB and account name check boxes.
7 Click Done.
When you are finished creating a shared folder, proceed to "Setting SMB/FTP Destination
Into the Address Book."
Setting SMB/FTP Destination Into the Address Book
You can register the connection details for SMB and FTP server in the address book using
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.
Before entering the destination information, make sure that you have the IP address of
your computer ready. See "Confirming the IP Address of Your Computer."
Scanning
231
After you finish registering the destination information of the SMB or FTP server, proceed
to "Sending the Scanned Data on the Network."
Confirming the IP Address of Your Computer
Perform the following procedure to check the IP address of the computer.
For Windows®:
The following procedure uses Windows® 7/Windows® 10 as an example.
1 Click Start All Programs Accessories Run.
For Windows® 10: Right-click the Start button, and then click Run.
2 Enter "cmd" in the text box, and then click OK.
A command prompt window opens.
3 Enter ipconfig, and then press  on the keyboard.
4 Write down the IP address.
For OS X:
The following procedure uses OS X 10.10 as an example.
1 Open System Preferences, and then click Network.
The IP address is displayed under Status.
2 Write down the IP address.
Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
1 Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2 Click Address Book.
232
Scanning
If a security login dialog box appears, enter user name and password.
NOTE:
• The default user name is "admin," and the default password is left blank (NULL).
3 Click the Server Address tab
Create of an ID.
The Server Address page appears.
4 Enter the information as follows to fill in the fields.
Name
Enter a name of your choice. This appears as the name for the Server
Address in the Address Book.
Server Type
Select FTP to send documents to an FTP server.
Select SMB to send documents to a shared folder on your computer
using Server Message Block (SMB).
Scanning
233
Server Address
Enter the name or IP address of the server or computer.
Example:
• For FTP:
Server name: myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
IP address: 192.0.2.1
• For SMB:
Computer name: myhost
IP address: 192.0.2.1
Share Name
Enter the name of the shared folder. See "Creating a Shared Folder
(SMB Only)." For SMB only.
• Example: Share, Sharefolder
Server Path
Enter the path of the sub-folder within the shared folder. If you have
not created a sub-folder, leave this blank.
When entering the sub-folder path, make sure that the sub-folder is
already created. Do not enter the name of the shared folder.
Example:
Shared Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic
Enter "MyPic".
If you have created a sub-folder within a sub-folder, separate each
sub-folder name with a backslash (SMB) or forward slash (FTP).
Example:
Shared Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,
Third-level folder name: John
• For SMB enter "MyPic\John".
• For FTP enter "MyPic\John".
Server Port Number
Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the
default value of 21 for FTP or 139 for SMB.
Available ports are:
FTP: 21, 5000 - 65535
SMB: 139, 445, 5000 - 65535
Login Name
Enter the user account name to allow access to a shared folder on
your computer or to an FTP server.
• For FTP: Contact your system administrator.
• For SMB: Windows® login name that you have specified in "Setting
a User Account (SMB Only)."
Login Password
Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.
• For FTP: Contact your system administrator
• For SMB: Empty password is not valid in the Network (Computer)
feature. Make sure that you have a valid password for the user
login account. See "Setting a User Account (SMB Only)."
Re-enter Password
Re-enter your password.
5 Click Apply New Settings.
Using Address Book Editor
The following procedure uses OS X 10.10 as an example.
NOTE:
• For Windows®, you can operate Address Book Editor with using the Tool Box on the Dell Printer
Hub and Dell Print Management Tool. See "Tool Box."
234
Scanning
1 Click Finder Applications Dell Dell Color Cloud Multifunction Printer H625cdw/Dell Color Cloud Multifunction Printer - H825cdw/Dell Color Smart
Multifunction Printer - S2825cdn, and then double-click Address Book Editor.
2 Perform either of the following:
Click New (Device Address Book)
New Server.
Server Address dialog box appears.
3 Enter the information as follows to fill in the fields.
Name
Enter a name of your choice. This appears as the name for the Server
Address in the Address Book.
Server Type
Select Computer to send documents to a shared folder on your
computer using Server Message Block (SMB).
Select Server to send documents to an FTP server.
Server Name/IP Address
Enter the name or IP address of the server or computer.
Example:
• For Computer (SMB):
Computer name: myhost
IP address: 192.0.2.1
• For Server (FTP):
Server name: myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
IP address: 192.0.2.1
Scanning
235
Share Name
Enter the name of the shared folder. See "Creating a Shared Folder
(SMB Only)." For SMB only.
Example: Share, Sharefolder
Path
Enter the path of the sub-folder within the shared folder. If you have
not created a sub-folder, leave this blank.
When entering the sub-folder path, make sure that the sub-folder is
already created and do not enter the name of the shared folder.
Example:
Shared Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic
Enter "MyPic".
If you have created a sub-folder within a sub-folder, separate each
sub-folder name with a backslash (SMB) or forward slash (FTP).
Example:
Shared Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,
Third-level folder name: John
• For SMB enter "MyPic\John".
• For FTP enter "MyPic\John".
Login Name
Enter the user account name to allow access to a shared folder on
your computer (SMB) or to an FTP server.
• For Computer (SMB): Windows® login name that you have
specified in the procedure 1.
• For Server (FTP): Contact your system administrator.
Login Password
Enter the password corresponding to the login name.
• For Computer (SMB): Empty password is not valid in the
Network(Computer) feature. Make sure that you have a valid
password for the user login account. See "Setting a User Account
(SMB Only)."
• For Server (FTP): Contact your system administrator.
Confirm Login Password
Re-enter your password.
Port Number
Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the
default value of 139 for Computer (SMB) and 21 for FTP server.
Available ports are:
For Computer (SMB): 139, 445, 5000 - 65535
For Server (FTP): 21, 5000 - 65535
4 Click OK.
Sending the Scanned Data on the Network
1 Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2 Press the
(Home) button.
Scan to Network Folder.
3 Tap
4 Tap the desired address
Done.
If the desired address is not displayed, swipe the screen.
5 Tap
, and then check and change the scan settings.
See "Scan Settings."
6 Tap Scan.
236
Scanning
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you to
scan another page.
•
•
If you want to scan another page, place the document, and then tap Continue.
If you are finished scanning, tap Done.
Scanning to a USB Flash Drive
The Scan to USB feature allows you to store scanned data directly to a USB flash drive
attached to the printer without using software.
See "Supported USB Flash Drive."
Procedures
To store the scanned data to a USB flash drive:
NOTE:
• If you insert a USB flash drive to the front USB port first, the USB Drive Detected screen may
appear. In this case, select Scan to USB, and then proceed to step 6.
1 Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2 Press the
(Home) button.
3 Insert a USB flash drive into the front USB port of the printer.
4 Tap Scan to USB.
5 Select a folder to save the scanned data.
See "Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Data."
6 Tap
, and then check and change the scan settings.
See "Scan Settings."
7 Tap Scan.
CAUTION:
• Do not remove the USB flash drive while the printer is accessing the drive.
The data in the drive may be destroyed, or the drive itself may be damaged and become
unusable.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you to
scan another page.
•
•
If you want to scan another page, place the document, and then tap Continue.
If you are finished scanning, tap Done.
8 Remove the USB flash drive from the printer.
CAUTION:
• Make sure that the printer is not accessing the USB flash drive.
Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Data
To save the scanned data to a folder in the USB flash drive, specify the folder before
executing the scan job.
1 If folders exist in the USB flash drive, the folder names appear on the touch panel.
Scanning
237
2 Select a folder to save the scanned data.
NOTE:
• The default saving location is the root directory of the USB flash drive.
• You cannot directly enter a folder path using the numeric keypad.
• You can select any folder in the USB flash drive but cannot create a new folder in this step.
You should always create a new folder before connecting the USB flash drive to the printer.
If the name of the scanned data already exists in the folder, the printer generates a
new file name to save the data.
Sending a Scanned Data via E-Mail
You can send the data scanned as an e-mail attachment using the Scan to Email feature.
To send an e-mail, an e-mail account is necessary such as the corporate mail account or
the Internet service provider's mail account. Gmail account can be used as well.
The following are the procedures necessary to setup Scan to E-mail feature:
1 "Gathering the Necessary Information About Your E-mail Account"
2 "Setting the DNS Server Address"
3 "Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server"
Gathering the Necessary Information About Your E-mail
Account
To send an e-mail from the printer, the following information is necessary:
• E-mail account (user account) information
• E-mail sever information
NOTE:
• For details about your e-mail account or the mail server, contact your network administrator or
your Internet service provider.
• When the printer is connected to the network via a proxy server, the printer may not be able to
send the e-mail. In this case, contact your network administrator.
• The following preparations are effective while the e-mail account information is valid. You do not
have to repeat the settings whenever you send the e-mail.
Setting the DNS Server Address
To set the DNS server address to the printer, perform the following procedure:
1 Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2 Click Print Server Settings
the Print Server Settings tab
TCP/IP.
3 Perform either of the following:
• If you are using DHCP for TCP/IP setting for the printer:
Select the Enable check box for Get DNS Server Address from DHCP in DNS.
•
If you are setting TCP/IP manually:
Set Manual DNS Server Address in DNS.
4 Click Apply New Settings.
238
Scanning
Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server
To make the printer to send an e-mail, perform the following procedure:
1 Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2 Click E-Mail Server Settings Overview.
3 Set the mail server information as follows:
NOTE:
• In this procedure, the server settings for a Gmail account are used as an example. The server
settings differ for each e-mail service.
• Information about the Gmail account is based on the information as of October 2013. For the
latest information, visit the homepage of Gmail.
a In the Primary SMTP Gateway text box, set the primary SMTP gateway.
For example: smtp.gmail.com
b In the SMTP Port Number text box, enter the SMTP port number.
This must be 25, 587 or between 5000 and 65535.
For example: 587
c In the E-Mail Send Authentication drop-down list box, specify the authentication
method for outgoing e-mail.
For example: SMTP_Auth (Auto)
d In the SMTP Login User text box, set the SMTP login user.
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at
symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them
using commas.
For example: aaaa@gmail.com
NOTE:
• It is not recommended to share a personal e-mail account with the Scan to Email function
of the printer. Instead, use an e-mail account dedicated to Scan to Email function.
e In the SMTP Login Password text box, set the SMTP account password.
Scanning
239
Up to 31 alphanumeric characters can be used.
In the Re-enter SMTP Login Password text box, enter the login password again
to check it.
g Perform either of the following:
• If you have selected other than POP before SMTP (Plain) or POP before SMTP
(APOP) in the E-Mail Send Authentication drop-down list box, proceed to
step h.
• If you have selected POP before SMTP (Plain) or POP before SMTP (APOP) in
the E-Mail Send Authentication drop-down list box, enter the following:
– In the POP3 Server Address text box, enter the POP3 server address in IP
address format of aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd or as a DNS host name using up to 63
characters.
– In the POP3 Port Number text box, enter the POP3 server port number.
This must be 110 or between 5000 and 65535.
– In the POP User Name text box, set the POP3 account user name.
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at
symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate
them using commas.
– In the POP User Password text box, enter the POP3 account password.
Up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
– In the Re-enter POP User Password text box, enter the POP user password
again to check it.
h In the Reply Address text box, enter the reply e-mail address sent with each
E-Mail Alert.
4 Click Apply New Settings.
• If SSL/TLS is not used or if Invalid, POP before SMTP (Plain), or POP before SMTP
(APOP) is selected for E-Mail Send Authentication, the mail server settings are
complete.
• If SMTP authentication is selected for E-Mail Send Authentication and if SSL/TLS
encryption is used to communicate with the SMTP sever, the SSL/TLS type must
be set in SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication of SSL/TLS under the Security tab.
Proceed to step 5.
NOTE:
• To send an e-mail through Gmail, set the SSL/TLS type to STARTTLS in SMTP-SSL/TLS
Communication of SSL/TLS under the Security tab.
5 Click the Security tab
SSL/TLS.
6 Select a SSL/TLS type from the SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication list.
NOTE:
• To use a Gmail account, select STARTTLS.
7 Click Apply New Settings.
Registering a Destination E-Mail Address to Address Book
1 Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
240
Scanning
2 Click Address Book E-Mail Address tab Create of an ID.
The E-Mail Address page for registering a new e-mail address appears.
3 Enter the following:
• Name
• Address
4 Click Apply New Settings.
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned Data
1 Press the
2 Tap
(Home) button.
Scan to Email.
3 Specify a recipient by either of the following:
• If you want to enter an e-mail address directly:
a Tap the Enter Recipient's Address text box.
b Enter the address using the keyboard.
c Tap Done.
You can remove or edit the recipient by tapping + and the recipient you specified.
•
If you want to select from the following types of address books:
a Tap Address Book.
b Select a recipient from either of the following:
– Tap Individuals to select an e-mail address registered in the address
book.
– Tap Groups to select a group of e-mails registered in the address book.
– Tap Network Address Book to search an e-mail address from the LDAP
server address book.
See "Sending an E-mail With the Scanned Data Using the E-mail Server
Address Book."
c Tap Done.
Scanning
241
You can remove or see details of the recipient, or set the e-mail as Bcc by tapping
+ and the recipient you specified.
4 Tap Sender, and then specify the sender's e-mail address by either of the following:
• If you want to enter an e-mail address directly:
a Tap Keyboard.
b Enter the address using the keyboard.
c Tap Done.
• If you want to select from the address book:
a Tap Address Book.
b Select an e-mail address registered in the address book.
c Tap Done.
• If you want to select from the server address book:
See "Sending an E-mail With the Scanned Data Using the E-mail Server Address
Book."
NOTE:
• For details about address book and server address book, see "Using the Address Book and
Phone Book."
• For details about Network Address Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server
Phone Book."
• E-mail addresses need to be registered before you can select Address Book.
5 Tap
, and then check and change the scan settings.
See "Scan Settings."
6 Tap Send.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you to
scan another page.
If you want to scan another page, place the document, and then tap Continue.
If you are finished scanning, tap Done.
•
•
Managing the Scanner
You can connect the specified scanner, and set the password for the scanner.
Port Settings
When the printer is connected to the computer directly by a USB cable, select USB.
When the printer is connected to the network, select Network. Enter the IP address of
the printer in the IP Address text box, and then click OK.
When the Printer is Connected to the Network
When you are using DHCP for TCP/IP setting for the printer, the image capturing
software may not find the scanner occasionally due to the change of the IP address
allocated for the printer. In this case, check the IP address of the printer, and then
connect the scanner by specifying the IP address.
On Windows®, you can check the IP address of the printer using the Dell Printer Hub or
Dell Print Management Tool. Open Dell Printer Hub or Dell Print Management Tool, and
then click Printer information.
242
Scanning
Searching the Scanner
In the Port Settings tab, you can search the scanners from the network and select the
desired one from the detected scanners.
Search all scanners from the
network (Windows® only)
Select to search scanners in your network.
Scanner List
Displays a list of detected scanners.
Search again
Click to search the scanners in your network.
®
Search Criteria (Windows only)
Click to display the Search Criteria dialog box for setting the search
condition. See "Search Criteria Dialog Box (Windows® only)."
Search Criteria Dialog Box (Windows® only)
Subnet Address
Enter the subnet address.
• IPv4: Broadcast Address such as 192.0.2.1
• IPv6: Multicast Address such as 2001:db8::
Search Time
Specify a time period for searching a scanner.
Community Name
Enter the SNMPv1/v2 community name. The default community
name is "public."
Password Settings
In the Password Settings tab, you can input the password that is set for your scanner to
access from your computer to the printer.
For Windows®:
For OS X:
Scanning
243
Password for Scanner
Enter the password.
Changing the Default Scan Setting
NOTE:
• You can set the same setting using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer
Configuration Web Tool."
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab
Default Settings
3 Select the desired menu item.
If the desired menu item is not displayed, tap
Scan Defaults.
or
to scroll through the screen.
4 Select the desired setting or enter the value, and then tap OK.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed.
244
Scanning
Faxing
NOTE:
• If the Functions Control setting is set to On (Password), you need to enter the four-digit
password to use the function. If the Functions Control setting is set to Off, the function is disabled
and the menu is grayed out. See "Functions Control."
Initial Settings
To use the fax function, you need to perform the initial settings.
If you have already performed the initial settings for fax when you first turned on the
printer, you can skip this procedure. See "Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel."
If you have not performed the initial settings for fax, you can perform initial settings using
the Dell Printer Easy Install or Operator Panel.
Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Dell Printer Easy
Install
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer.
The Dell Printer Easy Install program starts.
2 Click Main Menu.
3 Click Change.
The Configure Printer screen appears.
Faxing
245
4 Click Configure the Fax settings
Next.
5 Follow the on-screen instruction.
Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Operator Panel
To set the fax settings manually from the operator panel, set the following menus.
NOTE:
• You can set the same setting using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer
Configuration Web Tool."
• If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password when entering Admin Settings.
See "Panel Lock."
•
Fax Number, Country, Fax Header Name, and Line Type:
From the
(Information) button Tools tab Admin Settings
Settings Fax Line Settings
Fax
If you use DRPD option, you can set DRPD Pattern here.
NOTE:
• When you configure the country setting, the settings relevant to it is initialized.
•
•
Receive Mode:
From the
(Information) button
Settings Incoming Defaults
Tools tab
Admin Settings
Fax
Tone / Pulse:
From the
(Information) button Tools tab
Settings Transmission Defaults
Admin Settings
Fax
For details about each menu, see "Fax Settings."
Changing the Fax Settings
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Fax Settings.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3 Select the desired menu.
4 Select the desired setting or specify a value.
To specify a value, tap – or +, or use the number pad or the keyboard.
5 Tap OK.
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 as needed.
For available options, see "Fax Settings."
Sending a Fax
You can fax data from the printer. You can also directly fax data transferred from a
computer running a Microsoft® Windows® operating system or a Macintosh computer.
Sending a Fax From Memory
1 Load the document(s).
246
Faxing
See "Loading Documents."
2 Press the
(Home) button.
Fax.
3 Tap
4 Tap
, and then check and change the fax settings.
See "Fax Settings."
To return to the previous screen, tap Back.
5 Enter or select a fax number by performing either of the following:
• If you want to enter a fax number directly:
a Tap the Enter Number text box.
b Enter the number using the keyboard.
c Tap Done.
• If you want to select from the phone book:
a Tap Phone Book.
– Tap Individuals to select an individual fax number.
– Tap Groups to select a group dial number.
– Tap Network Phone Book to search and select a fax number from the
LDAP server.
See "Sending a Fax Using the Fax Server Phone Book."
b Tap Done.
NOTE:
• For details about address book and server address book, see "Using the Address Book and
Phone Book."
• For details about Network Phone Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server
Phone Book."
• The fax number needs to be registered before you can select Address Book.
•
If you want to select from the speed dial:
a Tap Speed Dial.
b Enter the speed dial number using the number pad.
c Tap Done.
You can add more fax numbers by tapping +.
6 Tap Send.
NOTE:
• To cancel the fax job, tap Stop at any time while sending the fax.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•
If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
• When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
The printer starts dialing the number, and then sends the fax when the remote fax
machine is ready.
Faxing
247
Sending a Fax Manually
1 Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2 Press the
(Home) button.
Fax.
3 Tap
4 Tap
, and then check and change the fax settings.
See "Fax Settings."
5 Tap On Hook.
6 Enter the fax number of the recipient using the number pad.
You can also select the recipient by using speed dial number or address book. See
"Automatic Dialing."
7 Tap Send.
NOTE:
• To cancel the fax job, tap Stop at any time while sending the fax.
• Tapping Send does not start sending a fax when the available time is set or the Fax function is
locked. For details about the available time and the Fax function, see "Set Available Time" and
"Functions Control."
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•
If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
•
Confirming Transmissions
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer beeps and
returns to the standby mode.
If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on the touch
panel.
If you receive an error message, tap Close to clear the message and send the document
again.
You can set the printer to print a confirmation report after each fax transmission. See
"Fax Transmit."
Automatic Redialing
If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the
printer redials the number every minute based on the number set in the redial settings.
For details about how to change the time interval between redials and the number of
redial attempts, see "Fax Settings."
NOTE:
• The printer does not redial a number when you send a fax manually.
248
Faxing
Sending a Delayed Fax
The Delayed Start mode can be used to save scanned data for transmission at a specified
time to take advantage of lower long distance rates.
Once Delayed Start mode is activated, the printer stores all of the documents to be faxed
into its memory and sends them at the specified time.
After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is cleared.
1 Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2 Press the
(Home) button.
Fax.
3 Tap
4 Tap
, and then check and change the fax settings.
See "Fax Settings."
5 In the Fax Settings screen, tap Delayed Send.
6 Select the On check box.
7 Specify the start time by tapping – or +, and then tap OK.
8 Tap Back.
9 Enter the fax number of the recipient using the number pad.
You can also select the recipient using speed dial number or address book. See
"Automatic Redialing."
10 Tap Send.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•
If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
• When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
Scanning starts and the data is stored in the memory to be sent at the specified time.
NOTE:
• If you restart the printer, the stored documents are sent as soon as the printer is activated.
• If the specified start time overlaps with the time periods for the available time or the Fax
function, the printer cannot send the delayed fax at the specified time. For details about the
available time and the Fax function, see "Set Available Time" and "Functions Control."
Sending a Fax Directly From a Computer
You can send a fax directly from your computer using the driver.
NOTE:
• Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.
• If the specified start time overlaps with the time periods for the available time or the Fax function,
the printer cannot send the delayed fax at the specified time. For details about the available time
and the Fax function, see "Set Available Time" and "Functions Control."
Faxing
249
Overview
The following images use Dell H825cdw as examples.
Send data
Dell Color MFP
H825cdw Fax driver
Send fax
Sending machine
(this printer)
Receiving machine
(fax machine/
multifunction printer)
Procedure
NOTE:
• The names of the dialog boxes and the buttons may be different from those given in the following
procedure depending on the program you are using.
• To use this feature, you must install the fax driver. For Windows®, see "Installing the Software for
Windows® Computers." For OS X, see "Installing the Software and Print Drivers."
The following procedure uses Dell H825cdw as an example.
1 Open the file you want to fax.
2 Open the print dialog box from the program.
3 Click Dell Color MFP H825cdw Fax
OS X.
For Windows®:
For OS X:
250
Faxing
Preferences for Windows® or FAX Setting for
4 Specify the following settings.
NOTE:
• The settings made here are only applied to a single fax job.
For Windows®:
For OS X:
Transmission image quality
Select the output quality.
• Standard: For documents with normal sized characters.
• High Quality: For documents containing small characters or
thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
• Super-high image quality: For documents containing
extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the
remote machine also supports Super Fine resolution.
NOTE:
• Faxes printed in the Super-high image quality by Direct
Fax driver transmits at the highest resolution supported by
the receiving device.
Faxing
251
Transmission report
Specify whether to print a fax transmission result.
• Output regularly: Prints a transmission result after every fax
transmission.
• Output for non-transmission: Prints a transmission result only
when an error occurs.
• Do not output: Does not print fax transmission results.
Fax Cover Page
Specify whether to attach a cover page to your fax.
• According to Printer Settings: Determines whether to attach a
cover page to your fax in accordance with the setting you
specify in Fax Cover Page on the operator panel.
• Attach: Attaches a cover page to your fax.
• None: Does not attach a cover page to your fax.
Sender
Specify whether to print the sender's name on the fax cover
page.
• According to Printer Settings: Determines whether or not to
print the sender's name on the fax cover page based on the
printer settings.
• Enter a sender name: Allows you to enter a sender's name to
be printed on the fax cover page in Sender Name.
Sender Name
Enter a sender's name to be printed on the fax cover page.
The sender's name can be up to 30 characters. If it exceeds 30
characters, only the first 30 characters are printed.
5 Perform either of the following:
• For Windows®: Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box, and then
click Print.
• For OS X: Click Print.
The Recipient Setting dialog box for Windows® or the Set/Check Fax Transmission
dialog box for OS X appears.
6 Enter the destination for the recipient by performing the following.
For details about how to enter the destination, refer to the Help of the driver.
For Windows®:
252
Faxing
For OS X:
•
•
Enter the name and fax number directly.
Select a fax number from a phone book:
Look Up Phone Book
Select from a list of fax numbers saved in the file specified for My
Phone Book file.
Look Up Device Data
Select from a list of fax numbers saved in the Phone Book on the
printer.
Import and add file
(Windows® only)
Select a source file such as a CSV file, WAB file, MAPI, or a LDAP
server. See "LDAP Server" and "Fax Server Phone Book."
NOTE:
• When you are using Mac OS X 10.7 or later, you cannot use Look Up Device Data feature on
some programs.
• Enter the password in the Password text box in the Authorization area before sending a fax if
the fax function is locked with a password.
• If the Functions Control setting is set to On (Password), you need to enter the four-digit
password to use the function.
Faxing
253
7 Click Start Sending.
Automatic Dialing
Speed Dialing
You can store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations (001–200).
When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists, you cannot change
the speed dial number from the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Setting Speed Dial
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab
Admin Settings
Phone Book
Individuals.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3 Select the desired speed dial number.
If the desired speed dial number is not displayed, tap
screen.
or
to scroll through the
To jump to a specific speed dial number, enter the desired number and then # using
the number pad.
If a speed dial number is already set, the screen shows the name and the number of
entries.
4 Tap the Enter Name text box.
5 Enter the name, and then tap OK.
6 Tap the Enter Number text box.
7 Enter the fax number using the number pad, and then tap OK.
To insert a pause between numbers, press the
(Redial/Pause) button.
"-" appears on the touch panel.
8 Tap OK.
9 Repeat steps 3 to 8 as needed.
Editing Speed Dial
You can edit or delete a speed dial number.
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab
Admin Settings
Phone Book
Individuals.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3 Select the desired speed dial number.
If the desired speed dial number is not displayed, tap
screen.
4 Perform the following:
•
254
To edit a speed dial number:
Faxing
or
to scroll through the
•
a Tap Edit the Name or Fax Number text box.
b Enter a new name or a fax number, and then tap OK.
To delete a speed dial number:
Tap Remove Delete.
5 Repeat steps 3 to 4 as needed.
Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial
1 Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2 Press the
(Home) button.
Fax
3 Tap
Speed Dial.
4 Enter the speed dial number using the number pad, and then tap Done.
NOTE:
• Using the asterisk (*) in the first digit, you can send a document to multiple locations. For
example, if you enter 00*, you can send a document to the locations registered between 001
and 009.
5 Tap
, and then check and change the fax settings.
See "Fax Settings."
6 Tap Send.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•
If you want to scan another document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
• When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
The fax number stored in the speed dial location is dialed. The document is sent when
the remote fax machine answers.
Group Dialing
If you frequently send a document to several destinations, you can create a group of
these destinations and set them under a one-digit group dial location. This enables you
to use a group dial number setting to send the same document to all the destinations in
the group.
NOTE:
• You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial number.
Setting Group Dial
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Phone Book Groups.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3 Select the desired group dial number.
If the desired group dial number is not displayed, tap
screen.
or
to scroll through the
Faxing
255
If a group dial number is already set, the screen shows the name and the number of
entries stored in that group dial number.
4 Tap the Enter Group Name text box.
5 Enter the name, and then tap OK.
6 Tap Add from Address Book.
NOTE:
• The fax number needs to be registered before you can select Add from Address Book.
7 Select the desired speed dial number.
If the desired speed dial number is not displayed, tap
screen.
or
to scroll through the
8 Tap OK.
9 Repeat steps 3 to 8 as needed.
Editing Group Dial
You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a new number
to the selected group.
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Phone Book Groups.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3 Select the desired group dial number.
If the desired group dial number is not displayed, tap
screen.
or
to scroll through the
4 Perform the following:
• To edit a speed dial number:
a Tap Edit Enter Group Name text box.
b Enter a new name, and then tap OK.
• To delete a speed dial number from the group dial number:
Tap Remove.
5 Repeat steps 3 to 4 as needed.
Sending a Fax Using Group Dial (Multi-address Transmission)
You can use group dialing for Broadcasting or Delayed transmissions.
Follow the procedure of the desired operation. See "Delayed Send."
You can use one or more group numbers in one operation. Then continue the
procedure to complete the desired operation.
The printer scans the document loaded in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
(DADF) or on the document glass into the memory. The printer dials each of the
numbers included in the group.
Printing a Speed Dial List
You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a Speed Dial list.
256
Faxing
See "Report / List."
Phone Book
You can select or search the registered phone numbers from the phone books.
1 Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2 Press the
(Home) button.
Fax
3 Tap
Phone Book.
4 Specify the recipient by performing either of the following:
• If you want to select from the local phone book:
a Tap Individuals or Groups.
b Select the desired speed dial number or the group dial number.
If the desired number is not displayed, swipe the screen.
•
c Tap Done.
If you want to search from the server phone book:
a Tap Network Phone Book.
b Enter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search.
c Tap a recipient from the search result Done.
NOTE:
• For details about address book and server address book, see "Using the Address Book and
Phone Book."
• For details about Network Phone Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server
Phone Book."
• A fax number needs to be registered before you can select an address book.
5 Tap Send.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•
•
If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
Receiving a Fax
NOTE:
• To use the Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax mode, connect an answering machine to
the phone connector on the rear of the printer. See "Connecting a Telephone or Answering
Machine."
When the memory is full, the fax is received in the Telephone mode.
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes
The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same whether you are
printing, faxing, or copying, except that faxes can only be printed on Letter-sized,
A4-sized, or Legal-sized paper. See "Loading Print Media" and "Print Media Guidelines."
Faxing
257
Receiving a Fax Automatically
To automatically receive a fax, use the Fax, Telephone / Fax, or Ans Machine/Fax
mode. The default setting is Fax mode. See "Receive Mode."
NOTE:
• To use the Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax mode, you must connect an external
telephone to the phone connector on the rear of the printer. See "Connecting a Telephone or
Answering Machine."
Receiving a Fax Manually
When in the Telephone or Telephone / Fax mode, you can receive the fax manually.
See "Receive Mode."
Using Remote Receive
Use Remote Receive to manually receive a fax from an external telephone without
having to go to the printer.
To manually receive a fax using the external telephone, you must connect an external
telephone to the phone connector on the rear of the printer and also set Remote
Receive to On. See "Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine."
When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear a fax tone, enter the remote
receive code from the external telephone.
NOTE:
• When entering the remote receive code from the external telephone, press the number keys slowly
in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine, try entering the two-digit code
again.
• The default remote receive code is 00. You can change the two-digit code to a number of your
choice. See "Receive Mode."
• Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.
Using Manual Receive in On Hook
You can manually receive a fax by tapping Manual Receive in On Hook on the touch
panel.
1 When the external telephone rings, pick up the handset.
2 Make sure that you hear the fax tone, and then press the
3 Tap
Fax
On Hook
Receive
(Home) button.
Receive.
4 Hang up the hand set of the external telephone.
The printer begins receiving a fax and returns to the standby mode when the reception is
completed.
Receiving Faxes Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection
(DRPD)
The DRPD is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone
line to answer several different telephone numbers. The particular number someone
uses to call you on is identified by different ringing patterns, which consist of various
combinations of long and short ringing sounds.
258
Faxing
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must
be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring
Pattern Detection, you need another telephone line at your location, or someone
available to dial your fax number from outside.
To set up the DRPD:
NOTE:
• You can set the same setting using the Tool Box or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Tool
Box" or "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Line
Settings.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
until DRPD Pattern appears, and then tap DRPD Pattern.
3 Tap
4 Select the desired pattern, and then tap OK.
NOTE:
• The printer provides seven DRPD patterns. If this service is available from your telephone
company, ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service.
5 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again to apply the settings.
To receive faxes in the DRPD, you need to set the menu to DRPD. See "Receive Mode."
Receiving Faxes in the Secure Receiving Mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized
people. To restrict printing out all of the received faxes when the printer is unattended,
turn on the secure fax mode using the Secure Receive option. In the secure fax mode,
all incoming faxes is stored in memory. When the mode is turned off, all stored faxes are
printed.
NOTE:
• To turn on the secure fax mode, Panel Lock Control must be set to Enable.
To turn the secure receiving mode on:
NOTE:
• You can set the same setting using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer
Configuration Web Tool."
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Fax Settings Incoming
Defaults.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3 Tap
until Secure Receive appears, and then tap Secure Receive.
4 Tap Secure Receive Set
Enable.
5 Enter a four-digit password, and then tap OK.
When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, the printer stores it into memory
and Secure Fax Receive is enabled on the Print screen to let you know that there is
a fax stored.
Faxing
259
To print received documents:
1 Press the
(Home) button.
Print.
2 Tap
3 Swipe the screen until Secure Fax Receive appears, and then tap Secure Fax
Receive.
4 Enter a four-digit password, and then tap OK.
The faxes stored in memory are printed.
To turn the secure receiving mode off:
1 Follow the same steps 1 to 3 in "To turn the secure receiving mode on:."
2 Tap Secure Receive Set
Disable.
Receiving Faxes in the Memory
Since the printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making
copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper
or toner, the printer stores incoming faxes in the memory. And then, as soon as you
finish copying, printing, or re-supply the consumables, the printer starts printing the fax.
Polling Receive
You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.
1 Press the
(Home) button.
Fax
2 Tap
On Hook
Polling.
3 Enter the fax number of the remote machine using the number pad.
4 Tap Receive.
Reports Related to Fax
The following reports may be useful when using fax:
NOTE:
• For details about other reports and how to print a report, see "Report / List."
Speed Dial
This list shows all the numbers currently stored in the memory of the
printer as speed dial numbers.
Address Book
This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the printer's
memory as Address Book information.
Server Address
This list shows all of the numbers currently stored in the printer's
memory as Server Address information.
Fax Activity
This report shows information about the faxes you recently received
or sent.
Fax Pending
This list shows the status of pending faxes. You may print this list to
check your changes after changing any settings.
Print Meter
This report shows the total number of pages printed. The report is
titled as Print Volume Report or ColorTrack Report, depending on
the ColorTrack Mode setting.
260
Faxing
Changing the Default Fax Setting
NOTE:
• You can set the same setting using the Tool Box or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Tool
Box" or "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."
1 Press the
(Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab
Default Settings
3 Select the desired menu item.
If the desired menu item is not displayed, tap
Fax Defaults.
or
to scroll through the screen.
4 Select the desired setting or enter the value, and then tap OK.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed.
Faxing
261
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows® Only)
The Dell Document Hub is a convenient one-stop gateway to a variety of cloud services
to help you manage your documents. With the Dell Document Hub, you can convert
hard copy documents into editable digital content and store them directly in your
preferred cloud storage service. You can search for files across multiple clouds
simultaneously and then share and print content easily.
NOTE:
• Dell Document Hub is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Registering the User and Signing In to the Dell
Document Hub
To use the Dell Document Hub, you need a user account registered to the printer, and
sign in to the Dell Document Hub.
Registering a New User to the Dell Document Hub
Prepare the access information required for each of the cloud services you want to use,
and then make sure that you have a user account registered to the printer. See "Creating
a New User Account."
To Register a New User From a Computer
1 Access the Dell Document Hub website from your computer by entering the
following URL in the web browser:
www.dell.com/dochub
2 Follow the on-screen instruction.
An e-mail is sent to the registered e-mail address.
3 Check the e-mail and follow the instructions on the e-mail to activate.
To Register a New User From the Printer
You can start the user registration alternatively using the printer.
NOTE:
• To complete the registration process, you need a computer or mobile device to receive an e-mail
and access the Dell Document Hub website.
1 Log in to the printer as a registered user.
2 In the Home screen, tap Dell Document Hub
262
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows® Only)
New User
Next.
3 Follow the on-screen instruction.
Signing In to the Dell Document Hub
1 Log in to the printer as a registered user.
2 In the Home screen, tap Dell Document Hub.
The Dell Doc Hub Sign In screen is displayed.
3 Tap the E-mail text box, and then enter the e-mail address.
NOTE:
• You can also tap
to select a recently entered e-mail address from a list. The list can
contain up to eight recently entered e-mail addresses.
4 Tap the Password text box, enter the password, and then tap Done.
If you want to save your e-mail address and password, select the Save E-mail &
Password check box.
NOTE:
• The e-mail address and password are stored in the printer under your user account of the
printer. For security purpose, it is recommended that you protect your user account of the
printer with a password. If your user account is not protected with a password, unauthorized
users may login to your user account of the printer, and then access your documents in the
cloud services through the Dell Document Hub.
5 Tap Sign in.
NOTE:
• If all the tiles on the Dell Document Hub screen are pale and disabled when you sign in, you have
not completed the necessary procedures to activate your account of the Dell Document Hub.
Check the e-mail you received from the Dell Document Hub, and then activate your account.
Icons for the Dell Document Hub Screens
5 6 7
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows® Only)
263
1
Indicates that the cloud service is correctly associated with the Dell Document Hub.
Tap to display more information.
Indicates that the cloud service is not associated, or not linked correctly.
Visit www.dell.com/dochub to link it again.
Tap to display more information.
Indicates that the cloud service link with the Dell Document Hub has expired.
Visit www.dell.com/dochub to link it again.
Tap to display more information.
Tap to search for files in the current folder and subfolders (if any) from the selected cloud
service. This is displayed when you select Scan or Smart OCR Scan.
Tap to sort the results in ascending, descending, or by cloud services order.
Tap to change print, scan or e-mail settings.
Tap to preview the selected files, up to the first three pages of each file.
Tap to save print, scan, e-mail settings or folder as Favorite.
When the Favorite List Screen Is Displayed When You Tap the Tile
on the Dell Document Hub Screen
This means that your favorite settings for functions have been saved on the printer.
Select the desired setting from the list, or tap Skip to continue the procedure.
Returning to the Home Screen
Tap Back or press the
(Home) button.
NOTE:
• When you return to the Home screen by tapping Back or by pressing the
(Home) button,
sign-in status is maintained.
Next time you tap Dell Document Hub on the Home screen, you do not have to sign in while you
are logged in to the Home screen.
• You can tap Sign out as well to return to the Home screen, but the sign-in status is not
maintained. Next time you sign in to the Dell Document Hub, you need to re-enter your e-mail
address and password.
Logging Out From the Printer
Press the
(Log In/Out) button to log out from the Home screen and to display the
portal screen.
NOTE:
• When you log out using the
(Log In/Out) button, the sign-in status to the Dell Document
Hub is maintained as far as the Save E-mail & Password check box is selected in the step 5 in
"Signing In to the Dell Document Hub." Next time you tap Dell Document Hub on the Home
screen, you can skip the sign in process.
Searching for and Printing Files
You can search for the files saved in the cloud services, and print them from the printer.
You can search across multiple cloud services at once. This method is suitable when you
264
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows® Only)
want to search by the keywords, including the file name.
NOTE:
• To search for files across multiple cloud services, visit www.dell.com/dochub and connect the
cloud services with the Dell Document Hub.
• This feature is enabled only when your printer still has the black toner, and the waste toner box is
not full.
1 In the Dell Document Hub screen, tap Search for Files.
2 Enter the keywords, and then tap Search.
Files are searched across multiple cloud services you registered.
3 Tap the files you want to print.
NOTE:
• If the desired file is not displayed, swipe the screen.
• You can select up to 10 files.
• You can sort the results by tapping
and selecting the sorting order.
4 Tap
, and then preview the selected files.
The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews of the File
Preview screen.
•
•
•
•
To show the page in the large preview, tap the page in the small previews.
To preview other files, flick the screen side to side.
To specify the file as the one to be printed, select the check box at the upper-left
corner beside the small previews.
To return to the previous screen, tap Back.
5 Tap
, and then check and change the print settings.
See "Print Settings."
6 Tap Print.
NOTE:
• To cancel printing, tap Stop.
• You can start printing by tapping Print in any screens of Search Results, File Preview or
Print Settings.
Browsing and Printing Files
You can browse and print the files saved in the selected cloud services. This method is
suitable when you know which cloud service the file you want to print is located in.
1 In the Dell Document Hub screen, tap Browse for Files.
The Cloud Services screen is displayed.
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows® Only)
265
To link the cloud service with the Dell Document Hub, visit
www.dell.com/dochub.
2 Tap the cloud service you want to browse in.
NOTE:
• If the desired cloud service is not displayed, swipe the screen.
3 Select the file you want to print by performing either of the following:
• Tap the location you want to browse in and the file you want to print.
NOTE:
• If the desired location is not displayed, swipe the screen.
•
Search the files in the selected cloud service.
a Tap
b Enter the file name or keywords, and then tap Search.
NOTE:
• You can sort the results by tapping
and selecting the sorting order.
c Tap Back to return to the previous screen.
NOTE:
• You can select up to 10 files.
4 Tap
, and then preview the selected files.
NOTE:
On the File Preview screen, the first three pages of each file are displayed.
To show the page in the large preview, tap the page in the small previews.
To preview other files, flick the screen side to side.
To specify the file as the one to be printed, select the check box at the upper-left corner
beside the small previews.
• To return to the previous screen, tap Back.
•
•
•
•
5 Tap
, and then check and change the print settings.
See "Print Settings."
NOTE:
• You can save your print settings and file path to the cloud service as a favorite.
1 Tap
in the Print Settings screen.
2 Name your favorite in the Save Favorite screen, and then tap Save.
• If you choose a name for a favorite that is the same as an existing favorite, the settings and the
file path will be overwritten.
• You can delete an unnecessary favorite by tapping
• Once you save your settings as a favorite, you can recall those settings the next time you sign
in to the Dell Document Hub from any printer of the same model.
266
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows® Only)
6 Tap Print.
NOTE:
• To cancel printing, tap Stop.
• You can start printing by tapping Print in any screens of contents list, Search Results, File
Preview, or Print Settings.
Scanning
You can scan the document and save the scanned data in the cloud service.
1 In the Dell Document Hub screen, tap Scan.
The Cloud Services screen is displayed.
2 Select the destination you want to save the scanned data to by performing either of
the following:
• Tap a cloud service you want to save the scanned data to, and then perform
either of the following:
– Tap the location you want to save the scanned data to.
NOTE:
• If the location is not displayed, swipe the screen.
– Search the files in the selected cloud service.
a Tap
b Enter the file name or keywords, and then tap Search.
NOTE:
• You can sort the results by tapping
•
and selecting the sorting order.
c Tap Back to return to the previous screen.
Search the files across multiple cloud services.
a Tap
b Enter the file name or keywords, and then tap Search.
NOTE:
• You can sort the results by tapping
and selecting the sorting order.
c Tap Back to return to the previous screen.
3 Tap Next.
4 Tap the File Name text box, and then enter the file name.
5 Tap the File Format box, and then select a file format.
6 Tap
, and then check and change the scan settings.
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows® Only)
267
See "Scan Settings."
NOTE:
• You can save your print settings and file path to the cloud service as a favorite.
1 Tap
in the Scan Settings screen.
2 Name your favorite in the Save Favorite screen, and then tap Save.
• If you choose a name for a favorite that is the same as an existing favorite, the settings and the
file path will be overwritten.
• You can delete an unnecessary favorite by tapping
• Once you save your settings as a favorite, you can recall those settings the next time you sign
in to the Dell Document Hub from any printer of the same model.
7 Tap Scan.
NOTE:
• To cancel scanning, tap Stop.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•
If you want to scan another document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
•
Scanning the Document Using Optical Character
Recognition (OCR)
You can scan the document using OCR, and save it in the cloud service.
1 In the Dell Document Hub screen, tap Smart OCR Scan.
The Cloud Services screen is displayed.
2 Select the destination you want to save the converted file to by performing either of
the following:
• Tap a cloud service you want to save the converted file to, and then perform
either of the following:
– Tap the location you want to save the converted file to.
NOTE:
• If the location is not displayed, swipe the screen.
– Search the files in the selected cloud service.
a Tap
b Enter the file name or keywords, and then tap Search.
NOTE:
• You can sort the results by tapping
268
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows® Only)
and selecting the sorting order.
•
c Tap Back to return to the previous screen.
Search the files across multiple cloud services.
a Tap
b Enter the file name or keywords, and then tap Search.
NOTE:
• You can sort the results by tapping
and selecting the sorting order.
c Tap Back to return to the previous screen.
3 Tap Next.
4 Tap the File Name text box, and then enter the file name.
5 Tap the File Format box, and then select a file format.
6 Tap
, and then check and change the scan settings.
See "Smart OCR Scan" and "Scan Settings.”
NOTE:
• You can save your print settings and file path to the cloud service as a favorite.
1 Tap
in the Scan Settings screen.
2 Name your favorite in the Save Favorite screen, and then tap Save.
• If you choose a name for a favorite that is the same as an existing favorite, the settings and the
file path will be overwritten.
• You can delete an unnecessary favorite by tapping
• Once you save your settings as a favorite, you can recall those settings the next time you sign
in to the Dell Document Hub from any printer of the same model.
7 Tap Scan.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•
•
If you want to scan another document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
Sending the Scanned Data to Yourself via E-Mail
The document can be scanned and sent to you as an attached file of an e-mail.
1 In the Dell Document Hub screen, tap E-mail Me.
The E-mail Me screen is displayed.
2 Tap the File Format box, and then select a file format.
3 Tap the Subject text box, and then enter the subject of the mail sent with the
scanned data.
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows® Only)
269
4 Tap
, and then check and change the e-mail settings.
See "E-mail Me" and "Scan Settings."
NOTE:
• You can save your e-mail settings to the cloud service as a favorite.
1 Tap
in the E-mail Settings screen.
2 Name your favorite in the Save Favorite screen, and then tap Save.
• If you choose a name for a favorite that is the same as an existing favorite, the settings and the
file path will be overwritten.
• You can delete an unnecessary favorite by tapping
• Once you save your settings as a favorite, you can recall those settings the next time you sign
in to the Dell Document Hub from any printer of the same model.
5 Tap Send.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•
If you want to scan another document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
•
Sending a Scanned Data of a Business Card to Yourself
via E-Mail
Business cards can be scanned and converted to vCard files, and sent to you as an
attached file of an e-mail.
1 In the Dell Document Hub screen, tap Business Card Reader.
The Business Card Reader screen is displayed.
2 Tap the Subject text box, and then enter the subject of the e-mail sent with the
vCard file.
3 Tap
, and then check and change the e-mail settings.
a Tap OCR Language, and then select a language.
b Tap Back to return to the previous screen.
4 Tap Send.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•
If you want to scan another document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
•
270
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows® Only)
5
Know Your Printer
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
272
User Authentication
286
Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization
290
Using the Address Book and Phone Book
292
Using Digital Certificates
298
Understanding Printer Messages
307
Specifications
317
271
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
Overview
Use the Software and Documentation disc to install a combination of software
programs.
Windows®
Item
OS X
Linux
Dell Printer Hub/Dell Print Management Tool
Printer Status Window
Status Monitor Console
Status Monitor Widget
Tool Box
Address Book Editor
ScanButton Manager
Dell™ Supplies Management System
User Setup Disk Creating Tool
App Manager
: supported, Blank: not supported)
Dell Printer Hub/Dell Print Management Tool
NOTE:
• Dell Printer Hub is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
• Dell Print Management Tool is available on Dell S2825cdn.
• It is supported on only Windows® 7 or later.
This software consolidates your printer management, monitoring tools and cloud
connectivity.
You can conveniently access printer utilities, advanced scan features and
printer/consumables details, and receive notifications on driver/software updates as well
as printer status.
To launch the Dell Printer Hub/Dell Print Management Tool, click Start All Programs
Dell Printers Dell Printer Hub or Dell Print Management Tool.
The Dell Printer Hub and Dell Print Management Tool have the following software and
directories:
• Address Book Editor
See "Address Book Editor."
•
Tool Box
See "Tool Box."
•
Printer Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Displays the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer Configuration
Web Tool."
•
•
Configuration tool
App Manager
See "App Manager."
272
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
See the FAQ on the Dell Printer Hub or Dell Print Management Tool.
Printer Status Window
The Printer Status window alerts you when there is a warning or an error such as paper
jams and low toner.
By default, the Printer Status window opens only when an error occur. When an error
occur, the error message appears on the Printer Status window. You can set the Printer
Status window to always stay open when printing in Printing Status Window Properties.
You can also check the toner level, quantity of paper remaining or configuration of the
options for the printer.
See the help on the Printer Status window.
Status Monitor Console/Status Monitor Widget
Use the Status Monitor Console/Status Monitor Widget to manage multiple instances of
the Status Window for a particular printer.
To start the Status Monitor Console, select a printer from the list view or Printer
Selection, and then click the name of the printer to open the Status Window for that
particular printer.
For OS X, see "Using the Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh."
For Linux, see "Using the Status Monitor Console for Linux."
Tool Box
The Tool Box allows you to view, specify, and diagnose the system settings. See the help
on the Tool Box.
Address Book Editor
The Address Book Editor allows you to register the contact information such as phone
number and e-mail address. See "Using Address Book Editor."
Dell™ Supplies Management System
You can use the Dell Supplies Management System to order consumables online or by
phone from Dell.
See "Using the Dell Supplies Management System."
User Setup Disk Creating Tool
The User Setup Disk Creating Tool program is used to create driver installation packages
that contain custom driver settings. The User Setup Disk Creating Tool program is
located in the MakeDisk folder of the Utilities folder on the Software and
Documentation disc. The print drivers that are used are also located on the Software and
Documentation disc. A driver installation package can contain a group of saved print
driver settings and other data for things such as:
• Print orientation and Multiple Up
• Watermarks
• Font references
If you want to install the print driver with the same settings on multiple computers
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
273
running the same operating system, create a setup disk in a media or in a server on the
network. Using the setup disk that you have created reduces the amount of work
required when installing the print driver.
• Install the print driver in the computer on which the setup disk is to be created.
• The setup disk can only be used on the operating system on which the disk was
created or computers running the same operating system. Create a separate setup
disk for each of the operating systems.
App Manager
The App Manager is a utility that lets you manage the apps on the printer.
NOTE:
• App Manager is supported only on Windows® 7 or later.
The following tasks can be performed from the App Manager:
• Install, update, and uninstall apps
• Backup and restore printer settings, address books, and apps
CAUTION:
• Do not turn off the printer or the computer while backing up or restoring data.
NOTE:
• The App Manager can backup the data of 10 printers. For each printer, up to five backup history
can be cached.
• The following are not included in the backup data:
- Settings data of Default Settings, Network Settings, Fax Settings, Maintenance, Secure Settings,
and USB Settings
- Data that is integral with other setting data such as digital certificates
- Data that is specific to the printer such as an IP address
- Data that is not permitted to be backed up due to security reasons
- Settings about date and time, and also settings that are associated with date and time
- Data that are considered invalid for settings of the printer
• The time to send and create backup files may take longer depending on the data size.
• The features of the App Manager may not be used when the printer has an error. If the App
Manager does not respond, check and clear the status of the printer.
Preparing to Use the App Manager
To use the App Manager, it is recommended for your computer to have more than 25GB
of storage space.
NOTE:
• Your computer needs to be connected to a network. USB connection is not supported.
• .Net Framework4.0 or later is required.
Using the App Manager
The following procedure uses Windows® 7/Windows® 10 as an example.
1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell Printer Hub or Dell Print
Management Tool.
For Windows® 10: Click the Start button Dell Printer Hub or Dell Print
Management Tool.
2 Click Printers.
3 Click Add Printer.
274
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
4 Find the printer you want to register and click Add.
NOTE:
• If the printer you are looking for does not appear in the list, enter the IP address of the printer
in the search text box.
5 Enter the same ID and password that is used for the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool, and then click OK.
6 Click .
The screen returns to the printer list.
7 Click the printer you want to manage from the list.
NOTE:
• If the printer you are looking for does not appear in the list or cannot be accessed from the App
Manager, check that On is selected for the check boxes of Port9100 and SNMP in the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool
Print Server Settings tab
Port Settings.
Using the Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh
Status Monitor Widget is a printer utility that promotes efficient use of the printer
through the exchange of information between the Macintosh and the printer.
Status Monitor Widget
•
Monitoring Dell Printers
Allows you to check the status of Dell printers currently connected to your
Macintosh
•
Receiving Alerts
Alerts you when there is a problem, such as paper jams or low toner
•
Ordering Supplies
Allows you to access the web site to order supplies
Before Installing the Status Monitor Widget
Operating Systems
•
•
•
•
Mac OS X 10.7
OS X 10.8
OS X 10.9
OS X 10.10
Network Protocols and Interfaces
•
•
•
•
LPR
Socket 9100
Bonjour
USB 2.0 and 1.1 (When connecting with multiple printers of the same model via USB
cables, only the printer recognized first can be monitored in the Status Monitor
Widget.)
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
275
Installing the Status Monitor Widget
1 Double-click the Dell Color MFP H625cdw/Dell Color MFP H825cdw/Dell Color
MFP S2825cdn icon in the Finder window.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
When the Install Succeeded screen appears, the installation is complete.
NOTE:
• Entering the administrative login name and password are required during the installation
process.
Opening and Closing the Status Monitor Widget
Opening the Status Monitor Widget
1 Click the Dashboard icon in the Dock.
2 Click the Plus (+) sign.
3 Click the icon of Status Monitor in the Widget Bar.
NOTE:
• If the message Select a printer is displayed, select the printer in Preferences. See
"Preferences."
Closing the Status Monitor Widget
Click the Close (x) button in the upper-left corner of the Printer Status window.
Printer Status Window
When the Status Monitor Widget is activated, the Printer Status window appears on
Dashboard.
276
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
Printer Status Message Area
Displays a message of the current printer status.
NOTE:
• The Status Monitor Widget obtains the printer information at the updated interval that can be
specified in Preferences. Also, the printer status is refreshed when Dashboard appears or
Preferences is closed.
• If the Status Monitor Widget receives no response from the printer, the message Cannot get
printer information is displayed.
• When the printer is connected via USB cable, you cannot check the status of the printer during a
print or scan job.
Printer Status Image Area
Displays the image of printer condition.
• Estimated Toner Level image
Displays the estimated toner level of each color if the printer is functioning properly.
NOTE:
• If the utility does not receive a response from the printer, the Unknown toner image is
displayed.
•
Printer error image
Displays an indication image when an error occurs.
When this image is displayed, the printer cannot be used.
Order Supplies Button
Displays the Order window.
To hide the Order window, click Order Supplies again.
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
277
Info (i) Button
Opens Preferences.
NOTE:
• The info (i) button appears on the lower-right corner of the window when the cursor is over the
Printer Status window. The info (i) button is a standard used across all widgets.
Order Window
This window provides you with the information for ordering printer supplies online or by
phone.
To open the Order window:
Click Order Supplies in the Printer Status window.
NOTE:
• The Order window appears when low toner is detected.
Order Online
•
Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site. hyperlink
Displays the web site for ordering Dell printer supplies.
•
URL list
Displays a list of available URLs where you can order Dell printer supplies.
Select a URL address to use when the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site
hyperlink is clicked.
Order By Phone
•
Phone number list
Displays a list of available phone numbers that you can call to order Dell printer
supplies.
•
Update phone contacts when rebooting check box
Select this check box to regularly update the phone number list.
Dell and the Environment
Click the hyperlink to access the web site about recycling.
278
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
Preferences
To open Preferences:
Click the info (i) button in the Printer Status window.
NOTE:
• The info (i) button appears on the lower-right corner of the window when the cursor is over the
Printer Status window. The info (i) button is a standard used across all widgets.
Printer
Displays a list of available printer names in the pull down menu. The first printer
displayed in this list is set as default.
Status Update Interval
You can specify the update interval of the printer status. By default, it is set to obtain the
printer information every 10 seconds.
SNMP Community Name
You can change the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) community name if
using default community name (public). Up to 31 characters can be entered.
Service Tag Button
Click this button to obtain the service tag.
NOTE:
• You cannot retrieve the service tag when the printer is connected via USB cable.
done Button
Click this button to return to the Printer Status window.
Using the Status Monitor Console for Linux
Status Monitor Console is a printer utility that promotes efficient use of the printer
through the exchange of information between the Linux and the printer.
Status Monitor Console
•
Monitoring Dell Printers
Allows you to check the status of Dell printers currently connected to your Linux.
•
Receiving Alerts
Alerts you to problems, such as paper jams or low toner.
•
Ordering Supplies
Allows you to access the web site to order supplies.
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
279
Before Installing the Status Monitor Console
NOTE:
• The Status Monitor Console requires the following modules installed.
- Python, PyGTK, Net-SNMP, cups-libs, and xdg-open
Make sure that these modules are installed before you install the Status Monitor Console.
• The Status Monitor Console is available when the printer is connected to a network (LPR or Socket
9100). USB connection is not supported.
Distributions
•
•
•
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11
Ubuntu 12.04 LTS
Printing System
•
Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
Installing the Status Monitor Console
1 Activate the terminal, and then log in as a super user.
2 Enter the following rpm command in the terminal window.
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop and SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11:
# rpm -ivh (Type the package file name)
For Ubuntu 12.04 LTS:
# dpkg -i (Type the package file name)
Starting the Status Monitor Console
1 Click Dell Printers Status Monitor Console
See "Printer Selection Window."
2 Select the printer.
See "Printer Status Window."
Printer Selection Window
280
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
Printers List
All the printers registered in the Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS) are displayed in a
list.
• Status icons:
Ready
Unknown/Offline/Toner Low/Paper Low
Door Open/Paper Jam/No Toner/Out Of Paper
Settings Button
Opens the Settings window.
Details Button
Opens the Printer Status window. If a non-supported printer is selected, it opens the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."
Refresh Button
Updates the information of printers.
Close Button
Closes the Printer Selection window.
Printer Status Window
When the printer is specified in the Printer Selection window, the Printer Status window
appears.
Printer Status Message Area
Displays a message of the current printer status.
NOTE:
• The Status Monitor Console obtains the printer information at the updated interval that can be
specified in the Settings window. To refresh the printer status, click Refresh.
• If the Status Monitor Console receives no response from the printer, the message Cannot get
printer information is displayed.
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
281
Printer Status Image Area
•
Current Toner Status icons
Displays icons of the current status of each toner.
The toner level is more than 30%.
The toner level is less than 29%.
The toner level is less than 9%.
The toner level is unknown.
•
Estimated Toner Level images
Informs about the amount of toner that remains for each color.
Toner Alert
Displays an alert message when any remaining toner is low, empty, or unknown.
Order Online
•
Order Supplies Online button
Displays the web site for ordering Dell printer supplies. This button appears when the
amount of toners becomes less than 30%.
Refresh Button
Updates the status of the printer.
Close Button
Closes the Printer Status window.
Dell Supplies Management System Window
This window provides you with the information for ordering printer supplies by
telephone or from the web site.
To open the Dell Supplies Management System window:
Click Order Supplies Online in the Printer Status window.
OR
Click Dell Printers Dell Supplies Management System.
282
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
Select Printer Model
Select the printer model name.
Order Online
•
Order Supplies Online button
– When the Regular URL is selected in the Select Reorder URL:
Displays Service Tag window.
– When the Premier URL is selected in the Select Reorder URL:
Displays the procurement and support web site.
•
Select Reorder URL
Displays a list of available URLs where you can order Dell printer supplies. Select a
URL address to use when the Order Supplies Online button is clicked.
– Regular URL: http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna/PrinterSeg.aspx
– Premier URL: http://premier.dell.com
Order by Phone
•
To order Dell printer supplies by phone, call the following
Select your country with phone number from the list, and then call the displayed
telephone number.
•
Update phone contacts when rebooting check box
Select this check box to regularly update the phone number list.
Dell and the Environment
Click the hyperlink to access the web site about recycling.
Close Button
Closes the Dell Supplies Management System window.
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
283
Service Tag Window
Enter the Dell printer service tag.
NOTE:
• For details about the service tag, see "Express Service Code and Service Tag."
Settings Window
Click Settings in the Printer Selection window.
Update of status
•
Printer Status is regularly updated check box
Select the check box to enable the printer status to be updated by the specified
interval.
•
Update interval text box
Specify the update interval of the printer status.
Port Number Settings
•
Port Number
Specify the port number in the Port Number text box to open the setting page of the
printer in a web browser.
Protocol Settings - SNMP
•
Community Name
Enter the Community name of SNMP in the Community Name text box.
Order URL
•
284
Select Reorder URL
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
The selected URL address is set as default web site for the Select Reorder URL in the
Dell Supplies Management System window.
Software Update
Software, driver, and firmware updates can be downloaded from the Dell Support web
site located at www.dell.com/support.
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
285
User Authentication
Using the user authentication setting, it is possible to create and manage up to 18 user
accounts secured with a password. Each user of the accounts can customize the Home
screen and save the changes.
You can select the user authentication method from either local authentication or
remote authentication. To use the remote authentication method, the LDAP or Kerberos
server is required to authenticate the user.
To select the user authentication method, see "Desktop Login" or "Desktop
Authentication."
It is also possible to associate NFC (Near Field Communication) capable ID Cards to user
account. When an ID card is associated with a user account, you can login to that user
account by tapping the ID card to the NFC reader, or waving the ID card over the NFC
reader.
NOTE:
• The printer supports the following card types:
- MIFARE® Ultralight
- MIFARE Standard (Classic) 1K
- MIFARE Standard (Classic) 4K
• The NFC feature is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
• The portal screen is available when you select the local authentication.
• Remote authentication is available for Dell S2825cdn only.
Creating and Editing the User Accounts
To use user authentication, you must first create a user account.
Creating a New User Account
1 Turn on the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed.
NOTE:
• If other account was created and specified as Initial Login, the Home screen of the
account appears.
2 Tap
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3 Tap OK.
The printer enters the edit mode, and Add Account is displayed in the portal screen.
NOTE:
• In the edit mode, each tile except Add Account has
4 Enter the account name, tap Done, and then select the tile color.
You can preview the image of your custom tile in Preview.
286
User Authentication
Account Settings 1/2
Account Name
Preview
Guest
Preview
Guest
Tile Color
Print
Back
Next
5 Tap Next.
6 Enter the account password and NFC ID.
To display the Home screen of your account when you turn on the printer, select the
Initial Login check box.
NOTE:
• If no account is specified as Initial Login, the portal screen is displayed when you turn on
the printer.
• You can create a new account without setting the account password and NFC ID.
• When the NFC Authentication is disabled, NFC ID is not displayed. NFC Authentication is
available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
• When you use UID as the NFC ID, enter the hexadecimal characters. The characters A to F
should be entered in the capital letters.
7 Tap Done
Done.
Editing the User Account
1 Tap
in the portal screen.
2 Tap OK.
3 Tap the account tile you want to edit.
4 Edit the account name, tile color, password, NFC ID, or Initial Login.
NOTE:
• When the NFC authentication is disabled, NFC ID is not displayed. NFC Authentication is
available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
5 Tap Done.
Deleting the User Account
1 Tap
in the portal screen.
2 Tap OK.
3 Tap and hold the account tile you want to delete.
4 Drag the tile to
5 Tap OK.
Logging In to the User Account
There are two ways to log in to the account. One is to log in using the touch panel, and
User Authentication
287
the other is to log in using the NFC authentication card.
NOTE:
• NFC Authentication is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Logging In Using the Touch Panel
1 Start the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed.
2 Tap the account tile you want to log in to.
NOTE:
• When the account you want to log in to does not require a password, skip step 3. The Home
screen is displayed.
3 Enter the account password, and then tap Login.
Logging In Using the NFC Authentication Card
NOTE:
• NFC Authentication is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
• To use the NFC authentication card, the following settings are required:
- Enable the NFC authentication setting in Secure Settings of the operator panel. See "NFC
Authentication."
- Register your user account to the printer. See "Creating a New User Account."
1 Turn on the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed.
NOTE:
• The NFC authentication is available only when the portal screen is displayed.
2 Wave the card over the NFC reader on the printer.
Logging In Using the Local Authentication or Remote
Authentication
Specifying the User Authentication Method
Use the operator panel menu or the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For details
about how to specify the user authentication method, see "Desktop Login" or "Desktop
Authentication."
Preparations for Remote Authentication
To use the remote authentication method, the printer needs to be specified so that the
printer can access to the LDAP or Kerberos server, and that the users need to be
registered to the Server Address Book. For details, see "Using the Server Address Book
and Server Phone Book" and "Using the Address Book and Phone Book."
Logging In for Remote Authentication
The Sign in screen is displayed when the printer is turned on while the printer is
specified to use the remote authentication method.
Enter the login name and password registered in the LDAP or Kerberos server to log in to
the printer.
288
User Authentication
Logging Out
When there is an account which is specified as Initial Login, the Home screen of the
account is always displayed after the printer is turned on. To log in to another account,
you need to log out first.
1 Press the
(Log In/Out) button.
User Authentication
289
Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization
The Home screen is like a desktop of your computer and customizable to suit your
preference or work style.
For example, you can gather only the tiles you often use, or rearrange the tiles so that
you can easily access the tiles you often use.
Home
Guest
Dell
Document
Hub
Copy
Print
PDF/TIFF
Fax
The tiles on the Home screen can be the shortcuts to the jobs to be performed on the
printer, like "taking seven copies of the handouts for the weekly meeting in two-sided
color copy" or "scanning the document and sending the scanned data to my boss by
e-mail." If you create a tile for a job with such job settings, the printer changes the
settings of the printer as you specified just by tapping the tile.
Adding a New Tile
You can select and add the tile from the pre-defined tiles, or you can create a new
customized tile which includes specific settings for copy, fax, scan or print. Up to 28 tiles
can be placed in your Home screen.
You can also add tiles to each of the copy, print, scan, and fax group screen that is
displayed when tapping the icons in the Dock Menu. Up to 8 tiles can be placed in each
group screen.
NOTE:
• If a tile is added to the Home screen, it will also be added to the relevant group screen. If a tile is
added to a group screen, it will also be added to the Home screen.
Selecting From the Pre-defined Tiles
The printer offers the pre-defined tiles which include the default job settings.
1 On the Home screen or group screen, tap Add App.
NOTE:
• If the maximum number of tiles have been reached in a group screen, the tiles relevant to the
group is not displayed in the list.
2 Tap the tile you want to add to your Home screen or group screen.
is displayed on the upper-right of the tile when you add the tile in your Home
screen.
Creating a New Tile Including the Job Settings
You may often use the same settings to copy a certain document, for example. You can
create the tile including those job settings and save it in your Home screen.
290
Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization
Creating Your Custom Tile
The following explanation is an example to create your custom tile for copying.
To create custom tiles for other jobs such as faxing, scanning, or printing, follow the
same procedures on the job settings screen of each job.
1 Tap the Copy tile in your Home screen.
2 Tap the setting tiles and change the copy options as needed.
See "Copy."
3 Tap
4 Tap the text box, and then enter the name of your settings.
5 Tap the color tile you want to set as your custom tile.
NOTE:
• You can preview the image of your custom tile in Preview.
6 Tap Save As.
NOTE:
• When a tile has the Lock icon, that function is controlled by the Functions Control setting. To
enable the function, you need to enter the password. See "Functions Control."
• When you save the job settings for Fax or Scan to Email as a custom tile, recipient information
is saved together with the settings. To prevent from sending faxes or e-mails to wrong recipients,
make sure that the fax numbers or e-mail addresses of the recipients displayed on the touch panel
are correct.
To prevent others from using customized tiles with personal information, log out from your user
account after you finish using the printer.
Editing Your Custom Tile
You can edit the job settings saved in your custom tile.
1 Tap the tile you want to edit in your Home screen or group screen.
2 Change the job settings as needed.
3 Tap
4 Tap the text box to name your settings if you want to rename your settings.
5 Tap the color tile if you want to change the color of the tile.
6 Tap Save.
NOTE:
• If you tap Save As instead, the new tile is added in your Home screen.
Moving or Deleting Your Tiles
You can move or delete your tiles from your Home screen or group screen.
See "Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles."
Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization
291
Using the Address Book and Phone Book
There are several address books available for Scan and Fax functions. Address books help
you organize contact information, such as e-mail addresses, fax numbers and server
information, and quickly choose the recipient or locate the address. The address book
data can be obtained from the printer or a remote LDAP server.
NOTE:
• Phone Book is described as one of Address Books in this section.
• For details about how to setup the LDAP server, see "LDAP Server" and "LDAP User Mapping." For
details about how to obtain e-mail addresses and fax numbers from LDAP servers, see "Using the
Server Address Book and Server Phone Book."
Types of Address Books
•
E-mail Address Book (for Scan to Email)
E-mail addresses registered for sending the scanned data via e-mail
•
E-mail Group (for Scan to Email)
Groups of e-mail addresses registered for sending the scanned data via e-mail
•
LDAP Server Address Book (for Scan to Email)
E-mail addresses registered in the LDAP server for sending the scanned data via
e-mail
•
Network Address Book (for Scan to Network Folder)
Computer and FTP server information registered for sending the scanned data to a
computer or ftp server
•
Phone Book (for Fax)
Fax numbers registered for sending scanned data from the printer
•
Group Dial (for Fax)
Groups of fax numbers registered for sending scanned data from the printer
•
LDAP Server Phone Book (for Fax)
Fax numbers registered in the LDAP server for sending scanned data from the printer
•
PC Fax Address Book (for Direct Fax)
Fax numbers registered for sending scanned data from your computer
•
PC Fax Address Book for group (for Direct Fax)
Groups of fax numbers registered for sending scanned data from your computer
Adding and Editing Entries to the Address Books
There are following three ways to add or edit entries to the address books:
• Operator panel of the printer
• Address Book Editor
• Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
292
Using the Address Book and Phone Book
Functions
Scan
Features
E-mail
Types of Address
Books
Entry Method
Operator Panel Address Book
on the Printer Editor
Dell Printer
Configuration
Web Tool
Address Book
E-mail Group
Server Address Book
(LDAP server)
Fax
Network
Address Book
Fax
Phone Book
Group Dial
Server Phone Book
(LDAP server)
Direct Fax
PC Fax Address Book
PC Fax Address Book
- group
: supported, Blank: not supported)
Using Operator Panel of the Printer
You can directly enter the fax numbers on the operator panel.
NOTE:
• For details about how to add a new entry, see "Setting Speed Dial."
Using Address Book Editor
You can use Address Book Editor installed on your computer to add or edit entries.
Address Book Editor is synchronized with the address books of the printer and updated
simultaneously as you save changes to the entries in Address Book Editor.
NOTE:
• When the printer and your computer is connected via USB, you must install the scanner driver.
With Address Book Editor, you can:
• Retrieve data from the address books of the printer at startup.
• Synchronize with the printer.
• Import the Address Book data from CSV file, WAB file, MAPI, and LDAP server.
• Export the Address Book data into a CSV file.
NOTE:
• Do not edit the exported CSV file with programs other than the Address Book Editor. Editing
the CSV file with other programs may corrupt the address data.
Address Book Panel
There are two address books you can manage in the Address Book Editor: Device
Address Book for Fax, E-mail, and Server and PC Fax Address Book for Direct Fax.
Editing an Entry
1 Select an Address Book that the entry you want to edit is stored.
Using the Address Book and Phone Book
293
2 Select an entry that you want to edit.
3 Click Edit, and then enter new information.
4 Click Save.
NOTE:
• When the address book entries are updated, it synchronizes with the printer and updates the
address books of the printer simultaneously.
Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
You can use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using a general web browser.
NOTE:
• For details about how to add a new entry, see "Address Book."
• When the address book entries are updated, the address books of the printer are also updated
simultaneously.
Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book
With the E-mail Server Address Book and the Fax Server Phone Book, you can specify
an e-mail address or fax number of a recipient registered in the external LDAP server
when sending a scanned data with e-mail or fax.
To use the E-mail Server Address Book and the Fax Server Phone Book, the printer
needs to be configured in order to access the external LDAP server.
NOTE:
• To configure the settings of the external LDAP server, contact your system administrator.
Preparing the Printer to Access the External LDAP Server
Set the following items using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.
• Authentication type
• LDAP Server
• LDAP User Mapping
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
To start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of the printer in the
address bar of a web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, verify the IP address by using the
operator panel, printing the system settings report, or using the ping command. See
"Verifying the IP Settings."
Setting Authentication Type
1 Click Print Server Settings
294
the Security tab
Using the Address Book and Phone Book
Authentication System.
2 In the Authentication System Settings drop-down list box under Authentication
Type, select LDAP as the authentication method, and then click Apply New Settings.
NOTE:
• When the server you are accessing uses the Kerberos authentication, select Kerberos as the
authentication method. To set the information necessary to access the Kerberos server, enter
the information in Kerberos Server under the Security tab. See "Kerberos Server."
3 Click Restart Printer.
Setting LDAP Server
NOTE:
• When SSL/TLS communication is required to access the LDAP server, select the Enable check box
for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication in SSL/TLS under the Security tab. See "SSL/TLS."
1 Click Print Server Settings
the Security tab
LDAP Server.
2 In the IP Address/Host Name & Port text box under Server Information, enter IP
address or the host name, and the port number.
Using the Address Book and Phone Book
295
The port number must be 389, 3268, or between 5000 and 65535.
NOTE:
• When LDAPS communication is required, set the port number to 636, and when you use the
global catalog, set the port number to 3269.
3 Under Optional information, set the following items.
For details about configuring each item, contact your network administrator.
a In the Search Directory Root text box, enter the search directory root.
b In Login Credentials to Access LDAP Server, select credential used to access the
LDAP server.
c In the Login Name text box, enter the login name.
d In the Password text box, enter the login password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric
characters. If the password is left blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server.
e In the Re-enter Password text box, enter the login password again to check it.
f In Search Time-Out, select Wait LDAP Server Limit if you want to follow the time
specified by the LDAP server. Select Wait if you want to specify the time.
g In the Search Name Order drop-down list box, specify the search order.
h In Server Address Book, select the check box if you want to enable the server
address book.
i In Server Phone Book, select the check box if you want to enable the server
phone book.
4 Click Apply New Settings.
5 Click Restart Printer.
Setting LDAP User Mapping
1 Click Print Server Settings
the Security tab
LDAP User Mapping.
2 Specify the attribute names used in the LDAP server.
NOTE:
• If the attribute names are not customized in the LDAP server, leave the settings in this step as
they are by default.
3 Click Apply New Settings.
4 Click Restart Printer.
296
Using the Address Book and Phone Book
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned Data Using the E-mail
Server Address Book
1 Press the
2 Tap
(Home) button.
Scan to Email.
3 Tap Address Book.
4 Tap Network Address Book.
5 Enter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search.
6 Tap a recipient from the search result, and then tap Done.
7 Tap Send.
Sending a Fax Using the Fax Server Phone Book
1 Press the
2 Tap
(Home) button.
Fax.
3 Tap Phone Book.
4 Tap Network Phone Book.
5 Enter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search.
6 Tap a recipient from the search result, and then tap Done.
7 Tap Send.
Using the Address Book and Phone Book
297
Using Digital Certificates
The authentication feature using digital certificates upgrades security when sending print
data or setting data.
This chapter describes how to manage digital certificates.
The printer supports the following digital certificate formats.
• PKCS#12
HTTPS, IPsec (PKI), Wi-Fi (WPA-Enterprise)
•
PKCS#7 (for CSR)
HTTPS, IPsec (PKI)
NOTE:
• For details about digital certificate error, see "Understanding Printer Messages" and "Digital
Certificate Problems."
The following is a typical setup flow for using digital certificates.
Prepare to manage digital certificates.
• Set HTTPS Communication
Import and set digital certificates.
• Import a Digital Certificate
• Set a Digital Certificate
• Check the Settings of a Digital Certificate
Set various security features using digital certificates.
Managing Certificates
This section describes how to manage digital certificates as follows:
• "Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication"
• "Creating and Downloading a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)"
• "Importing a Digital Certificate"
• "Setting a Digital Certificate"
• "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate"
• "Deleting a Digital Certificate"
• "Exporting a Digital Certificate"
Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication
Before managing digital certificates, set HTTPS communication with a self-signed
certificate.
1 Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2 Click Print Server Settings
the Security tab
SSL/TLS.
3 Click Generate Self-Signed Certificate of Machine Digital Certificate.
298
Using Digital Certificates
4 Select the size of public key from the list of Size of Public Key.
5 Specify the issuer of SSL self-signed certificate.
6 Click Generate Signed Certificate.
After the self-signed certificate is generated, the Restart Printer button appears.
7 Click Restart Printer.
8 Repeat steps 2 to 4.
The SSL/TLS page is displayed.
9 When the self-signed certificate is set correctly, the HTTP- SSL/TLS Communication
column is set to Enable, select the Enable check box.
Creating and Downloading a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
NOTE:
• To download a CSR from the printer, you must set up HTTPS communication. See "Preparing to
Use HTTPS Communication."
1 Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2 Click Print Server Settings
the Security tab
SSL/TLS.
3 Click Certificate Signing Request (CSR).
4 Specify each item of certificate signing request.
5 Click Apply New Settings.
6 Check the settings of certificate signing request, and then click Download.
7 Save a CSR file to your computer.
Use this CSR to receive a signed certificate from a trusted certificate authority.
Importing a Digital Certificate
CAUTION:
• Before importing a certificate file, backup the certificate file.
NOTE:
• To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. See "Preparing to Use
HTTPS Communication."
• Make sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer.
• After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute
exporting.
1 Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2 Click Print Server Settings
the Security tab
SSL/TLS.
3 Click Upload Signed Certificate of Machine Digital Certificate.
Using Digital Certificates
299

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Author                          : 40701
Create Date                     : 2015:08:31 17:27:59+09:00
Modify Date                     : 2015:08:31 17:52:33+09:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 12.0.2
Metadata Date                   : 2015:08:31 17:52:33+09:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.2 (Windows)
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : untitled
Creator                         : 40701
Document ID                     : uuid:a6622c76-465c-4115-aa97-9f098c3c2fce
Instance ID                     : uuid:ec615001-3346-4a0c-96cb-eb2d33dfdc3a
Page Count                      : 299

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools